Imdmanual

868 195/195 1536
PC-IMD User's Manual

3-July-14
Copyright 2014 Computational Dynamics Ltd., "CD-adapco"
Typefaces and conventions used in SPEED manuals
Item Format Example or explanation
Main text Courier New 10 pt Brushless permanent-magnet motor
Parameters Courier New Bold Slots, Poles, Torque, EMFCalc
Menu items
Arial 10pt bold
Menu items, functions, or items in
dialog boxes.
Parameter values Courier BLV, ToothFlux, 3.14159
Emphasis Italic
Short-cut keys [Bold] [Ctrl+S]
Design sheet
extracts
Courier 9pt Design sheet extracts
About this manual
This is a reference manual containing the definitions of parameters and methods in
PC-IMD. The theory of PC-IMD's algorithms can be found in Ref. [1], SPEED's Electric
Motors and various IEEE papers listed in the References.
Abbreviations
E degrees
.. Two dots following a parameter indicate an input value, to
differentiate it from an option or an output parameter with
the same name.
AWG American wire gage
d,q Direct and quadrature axes
e.g. exempli gratia, "for example"
EMF Electro-motive force (volts)
GDF Geometry Definition File. A general-purpose text file used
for transferring geometric and other data between
SPEED programs and PC-FEA and other finite-element programs.
GoFER lit. "Go to Finite-Elements and Return". The finite-element
link. This acronym emphasizes the particular feature of
SPEEDs finite-element links, in that they automate the
entire process of a range of specific finite-element
calculations and return data to the motor design program.
MMF Magneto-motive force (amperes)
i.e. id est, "that is"
lit. "literally"
p.u. Per-unit
PWM Pulse-width modulation
q.v. quod vide, lit. "which see": in other words, "go and look
that up too"
RMS Root-mean-square
SEM SPEEDs Electric Motors, Ref. [1]. This is where the theory
is explained. For induction motors, Chapter 3 is the main
reference, but Chapter 1 also contains useful general
information common to all motor types. SEM-3 means "Speeds
Electric Motors, Chapter 3".
Ted Template editor
Contents
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Motortypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Rotorbartypes(seereferencefigures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Parametersandperformancecalculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2. PC-IMDsFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 OutlineEditor[Ctrl+1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2 Templateeditor,Ted[Ctrl+3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3 WindingEditor[Ctrl+W] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4 Steadystateanalysis[Ctrl+2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.5 Torque/speedcharacteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.6 Linestartcalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.7 DriveSimulation[Ctrl+D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.8 Eigenvalueanalysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.9 No-loadcalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.10 No-load(rangingVs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.11 Ranging(Batchdesign)[Ctrl+B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.12 Designsheet[Ctrl+4] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.13 Customdesignsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.14 Phasordiagram[Ctrl+A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.15 Thermalgraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.16 Equivalentcircuitdiagram[Ctrl+E] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.17 Exportdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.18 GoFER(FELink)[F11] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3. Referencesection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.1 Inputparameters(OutlineEditor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2 Inputparameters:Ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3 Outputparameters(designsheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.5 Referencediagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.6 Recommendedsettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.7 ErrorsandWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3.8 Knownissues,correctionsandotherchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
PC-IMD 9.04 1. Introduction Page 1
Fig. 1 Design loop process
1. Introduction
1.1 General
A Function
PC-IMD is intended for designing and calculating induction motors. It is based on
the classical theory of the induction motor, with several extensions to this theory
developed by the SPEED Laboratory and our associates. The theory behind PC-IMD can
be found in SPEEDs Electric Motors (SEM), the text that is used with the
SPEED training courses, [1]; and in other published papers.
B IntendeduseofPC-IMD
The best use of PC-IMD is in:
1. studying and learning the design and performance of induction machines and
their control;
2. "sizing" or preliminary design; and
3. performing design calculations for whole ranges of induction motor products.
Design with PC-IMD is interactive and fast. However, PC-IMD doesn't produce
optimized designs by itself. The user produces them, using PC-IMD as a calculating
tool rather like a specialised spreadsheet program. PC-IMD improves the productivity
of the design engineer, but it doesn't do his/her job.
C HowdoIusePC-IMD?
Starting from a performance requirement, the motor is designed by a cut-and-try
process of assigning parameters to one of PC-IMDs predetermined motor models or
templates, and then calculating the performance using one of PC-IMDs calculating
procedures; see Fig. 1.
The process is repeated until the objectives are achieved. To make the motor design
fast and efficient, PC-IMD has an outline editor for modifying the cross-section and
other motor dimensions. There is a template editor for electrical parameters, drive
parameters, and several other inputs. A winding editor is included for displaying
the winding layout. PC-IMD also includes a material database for steels. The
performance calculation or analysis is either at a single operating point, or over
a whole torque/speed range. It includes a time-stepping model of the drive, so
that current and torque waveforms can be obtained. There is a design
sheet containing a wide range of performance parameters including the dimensions,
and details of the winding and the drive. All this data is presented in the
successful format used for many years in the SPEED Laboratory.
Page 2 1. Introduction PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 2 Design loop process with finite-elements, scripting and databases
D Whattheperformancecalculationincludes
The performance calculation includes virtually all the electrical and
electromagnetic performance of the machine: for example, torque, efficiency,
current, power factor and torque. Electrical parameters such as winding parameters
with resistances and inductances are presented in detail. There are many
dimensional and mechanical parameters including weights and inertias, and a
comprehensive set of thermal calculations is included. Magnetic flux-densities are
given in various parts of the machine, together with a detailed breakdown of losses.

E Scripting
The scripting language can be used to automate many processes, or to create new
algorithms or processes not already embedded in the program. It can also be used to
interface PC-IMD to other software. Fig. 2 shows how scripting can be used to
automate the variation of design parameters and the successive execution of PC-IMD.
(For studying the effect of simple parameter variations over a specified range of
values, the simpler internal ranging function can be used within PC-IMD).
F Finite-elementanalysis
PC-IMD has an efficient link to SPEEDs own finite-element program PC-FEA. The
link is called a GoFER (lit., "Go to finite-elements and return") and it uses the
GDF editor, which can also provide links to other finite-element programs. The PC-
FEA link is particularly useful because of its speed. Fig. 2 shows the finite-
element calculation supporting the performance calculation.
G Accuracy
The strongest point of PC-IMD is its speed and convenience in helping the engineer
determine the size, control requirements, and performance over a wide range of
parameters. But it takes several years to build up a reliable understanding of the
overall accuracy of a program such as PC-IMD, so please check your results and
regard them with a healthy scepticism. The main weaknesses are probably in the
traditional areas of difficulty in induction motor analysis: calculation of the
effects of saturation and effects associated with complex flux-paths (e.g.
differential leakage and stray-load loss); high-frequency effects; and core losses
(especially with PWM drives). However, efforts are constantly being made to improve
and upgrade the program in these areas.
1.2 Motor types
Polyphase cage-rotor
motors
3-phase with wye- or delta- connected windings
2-phase
1-phase
Polyphase wound-rotor
motors
3-phase with wye or delta-connected stator windings;
modified wave rotor windings
Split-phase cage-
rotor motors
In PC-IMD the term split-phase means a motor with a main
and an auxiliary phase, with different external start and
run impedances in series with the auxiliary winding. The
external impedances can be any series combination of
resistance and capacitance, and the change-over between
start and run impedances can be set by a number of
different methods. Split-phase motors run from a single-
phase supply.
This means that PC-IMD can be used to design and analyze
all the major variants of single-phase motor including
the following types defined by C.G. Veinott [5]:
Split-phase
Capacitor-start
Two-value capacitor
Permanent-split
Split-phase capacitor
and many other variants including several multi-speed
motors with tapped windings. The main and auxiliary phase
windings are displaced at 90 electrical degrees.
Note: the PC-IMD manual uses the term "single-phase motor" to mean a motor that
operates from a single-phase supply; this includes all variants of split-phase
motor, even though these machines have more than one phase winding. On the other
hand, the term "1-phase" is reserved for a motor that has only one phase winding.
The 1-phase motor can be classed as a polyphase motor, i.e., a degenerate case of
the m-phase motor with m = 1, as in the table above. But it can also be classed as
a split-phase motor with no auxiliary winding (Connex = SplitPh and AuxSpec =
SinglePh). For consistency, the PC-IMD manual writes "3-phase" for polyphase
motors with m = 3 and "2-phase" for polyphase motors with m = 2.
1.3 Rotor bar types (see reference figures)
Bar1/Bar2 Bar type
Type 0 Closed slot with pent top and round bottom
Type 1 Open slot with round bar
Type 2 Open slot with plain rectangular bar
Type 3 Open slot with "coffin" bar and parallel-sided teeth
Type 4 P Open slot with round top bar and rectangular bottom bar
Type 5 Open slot with round top bar and round bottom bar and
parallel-sided teeth
Type 6 Open slot with rectangular top and round bottom
Type 7 P Open slot with oblong top bar defined by 2 drill holes and
bottom bar defined by 3 drill holes
Type 8 P Open slot with trapezoidal top bar and rectangular bottom
bar
Type 9 Oblong open slot
Type 10 P Open slot with round bars separated by a neck
O-custom P User-defined open slot
C-custom User-defined closed slot
TypeG O User defined open slot
Double cage Double cage with any combination of the above slot types
except TypeG. Use DblCage. Note that DblCage in PC-
IMD means two separate cages, Fig. 103. A cage containing
bars with separate upper and lower bars is treated as a
single cage, and if DeepBar = Boldea the deep bar effect
will be correctly calculated including the effect of
different resistivities for the upper and lower bars (and
the neck). Type 4 bars are of this type: see Fig. 63.
P Slots with a neck can have up to three different materials: one for the top bar,
one for the bottom bar, and one for the neck. These materials have their own
conductivities and temperature-coefficients (see PC1, PC2, PCN, TCC1, TCC2, TCCN).
O TypeG rotor bar has 10 layers, each of which can have its own separate
conductivity.
Note that open rotor slots can be modelled as closed slots if muPlug = 0, (p. 66);
and stator slots can be modelled as closed slots using magnetic wedges; see SWedge
and muWedge, p. 58.
Fig. 3 Equivalent circuit used by PC-IMD for polyphase motors.
Erb represents the leakage flux in saturated rotor slot-bridges. The dotted lines show alternative locations for
the core-loss resistance Rc : see RcLoc, p. 96. Parameters in boxes are voltages that are displayed in the design
sheet.
1.4 Parameters and performance calculations
The main performance calculations are selected from the Analysis menu and include
steady-state analysis, the torque/speed curve, line-start calculation, no-load
calculation, thermal analysis, eigenvalue analysis, and ranging.
Performance calculations are based on the appropriate equivalent circuit model,
Figs. 4 and 5. The impedances are automatically calculated from the geometry,
winding data, and material data. However, there are several ways to force or modify
the values of equivalent-circuit impedances, including their components and the
parameters on which they depend.
In the classical equivalent circuit model (EQcct = SPEED), only the fundamental
space-harmonic of the airgap MMF is used in calculating torque. The equivalent
circuit of Fig. 4 is used for balanced polyphase machines. If EQcct = Alger, the
equivalent circuit incorporates a number of slot permeance harmonics, phasebelt
harmonics, and slot MMF harmonics, [1]. For single-phase motors, analysis is
possible by the cross-field method, the forward-and-backward rotating-field method,
and the symmetrical-component method; and a wide variety of tapped-winding
configurations can be analysed; in all these cases a certain number of MMF space-
harmonics can be included, as these can have an important effect on the torque/speed
characteristic.
Fig. 4 Equivalent circuit of split-phase motor, including capacitor motors and other
single-phase configurations.
A Leakagereactance;leakagesaturation;closedrotorslots
Several alternative methods are provided for calculating leakage reactance
components, including belt-leakage, zig-zag, skew and differential components; (see
DiffLeak and EndLeak). Slot-leakage and end-turn reactance components are also
calculated and included in the total.
Saturation of the leakage reactances X1 and X2 can be estimated by several different
methods. (See LkSat, Erb and XErb, kXL1, kXL2, kzz, kX1slot and kX2slot).
Two types of rotor slot (Bar1 = Type0 or C-Custom) are closed by a bridge that
readily saturates. All the other rotor slot types can have a saturable bridge of
fixed permeability muPlug <> 1 (and SBFull = false). When muPlug = 0 the bridge is
treated as though it were an integral part of the rotor lamination. It is not
permissible to set the slot opening to zero to try to convert an open rotor slot
into a closed rotor slot.
The simplest model of a saturable rotor slot bridge is the fixed EMF Erb which can
be adjusted using XErb. (See Fig. 4). An approximate estimate of the effect of
saturation on X2 (and X1) can be made with Norman's method, [29]. (See LkSat).
Norman's method has been extended for closed rotor slots; (use NeqnR = NS). These
methods are at or beyond the limit of analytical methods and the results should be
treated with caution; if possible, calibration by test and/or finite-element
analysis is recommended.
The differential components of leakage reactance can be automatically adjusted for
saturation of the main flux path (see DiffSat and DiffLeak), and this should
generally be sufficient at normal levels of voltage, current, and slip.
B Magnetizingreactanceandmainfluxsaturation
Saturation of magnetizing reactance is calculated either using the "60E" method or
a specially developed SPEED method which makes a detailed nonlinear analysis of the
airgap field and determines the effect of saturation with the fundamental space-
harmonic of the stator MMF. This method produces a flat-topped distribution of
airgap flux on no-load. (see MagCalc, Xm, kXm).
C Deep-bareffect
Deep-bar effect (skin effect in the rotor conductors) is calculated using a special
method that works with slots of any shape. Alternatively, the classical
rectangular-bar theory can be used. (See DeepBar).
D Coreloss
Core loss is generally calculated from the peak values of flux-density in the teeth
and yokes, using the modified Steinmetz equation (see WinSPEED manual). However,
if WFeCalc = Classical, specific watts loss values are used.
E Strayloadloss
Stray-load loss can be incorporated by a number of different methods (see SLLCalc).
Surface core losses due to slotting and MMF stepping are calculated if SLLCalc =
Detailed.
F Canloss
PC-IMD can calculate the losses in a stationary can fixed to the stator bore, or a
rotating can fixed to the rotor surface, or both.
G Interbarcurrents
Interbar currents can be estimated by a technique developed from the original work
by Odok, Ref. [31] (see Interbar). However this calculation is experimental and is
not recommended in normal work.
H Double-cagerotors
For motors with two separate cages the rotor branch containing Erb, X2 and R2 is
duplicated to give two rotor circuits in parallel. (See DblCage). Normal "vertical"
double-cage bars are handled by the DeepBar algorithm.
I Split-phasemotors;capacitormotorsandtapped-windingmotors
Split-phase motors are specified by setting Connex = SplitPh. In PC-IMD "split-
phase" motors include capacitor motors and resistance-start motors, as well as true
single-phase motors (AuxSpec = SinglePh). The method of calculation is selectable
from the method of forward and backward rotating fields, the symmetrical-component
method, and the cross-field method; (see Calc1ph and Fig. 51 on p. 102); iron losses
and magnetizing reactance saturation are incorporated in all these methods, and MMF
harmonics and leakage saturation can be included. In addition, PC-IMD can model
several types of tapped-winding motor; (see TapType and Tap).
J Finite-elementcalculations
Finite-element calculations can be run efficiently using the finite-element GoFER.
K Line-starttransients
Starting transients can be calculated using either a fixed-impedance dq-axis model,
or by means of a "quasi-static" computation based on the asynchronous torque/speed
curve. (See St. Calc, p. 50). The model includes point-on-wave switching so it can
simulate the effect of initial switching in soft-starters.
L Eigenvalueanalysis
For stability analysis of induction motors operating from constant V/Hz-type
inverters, PC-IMD calculates a root-locus diagram of eigenvalues over a range of
operating frequency.
M Thermalcalculations
PC-IMD has several different thermal calculations for calculating temperature rise.
The simplest (TempCalc = Fixed) works with fixed temperatures in all parts of the
machine. The most complex models are transient thermal simulations with extensive
graphical and numerical output. TempCalc = Hot10 is a 10-node model, and TempCalc
= Hot16 has additional nodes to allow for temperature variation in the axial
direction. There are also two simple models with only a small number of thermal
resistances and/or capacitances. All thermal calculations are automatically
incorporated in the Analysis | Steady-state analysis calculation. The thermal models are
defined in Figs. 108 - 111 on pp. 174-175.
N SimulationofPWMinverters,ACcontrollers,wye/deltastarters
PC-IMD includes a simple simulation of various forms of control circuit, including
wye/delta starters, AC series controllers, soft-starters, and PWM inverters.
Page 8 PC-IMDs functions PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 5 Main menu
2. PC-IMDs Functions
The common functions of all SPEED Windows programs are described in the
WinSPEED manual. This section provides further information specific to PC-IMD.
Function Hotkey Purpose
File, Options, Window, Help, Outline, Template, Design Sheet, Information, Scripting, Steel Database,
Calculator, Unit Converter
See WinSPEED manual
Data
Outline editor Ctrl+1 Display and edit the cross-section geometry
Template editor, Ted Ctrl+3 Edit non-geometric parameters
Winding editor Ctrl+W Display and edit the stator winding
Materials Ctrl+M Select materials (steel)
Thermal editor Ctrl+T Edit parameters of Hot10 thermal model
I/O Units Ctrl+U Select units
Titles Create or edit title, subtitle, and comment
to go with each datafile
User wire tables Specify files containing user-defined wire
tables
Custom editor Ctrl+Shift+3 Create, edit, or select a floating template
editor containing a subset of PC-IMDs
parameters. See WinSPEED manual.
Analysis
Steady state
analysis
Ctrl+2 Calculate a single operating point at fixed
speed and load. Includes thermal analysis.
Torque/Speed
characteristic
Calculate a complete torque/speed curve
Line-start
calculation
Calculate start-up transient
Drive simulation Ctrl+D Simulation of PWM inverter, AC series
controller etc
No load calculation Calculate no-load operation, at zero slip
No load calculation
(ranging Vs)
Calculate no-load operation over a range of
supply voltages
Eigenvalue analysis Eigenvalue analysis (stability analysis)
Ranging (batch
design)
Ctrl+B Calculate a range or batch of cases or
designs
PC-IMD 9.04 PC-IMDs functions Page 9
Results
Design sheet Ctrl+4 Complete listing of input and output
parameters
Custom design sheet Custom listing of parameters. See page 33.
Custom output Ctrl+Shift+4 Create, edit, or select a floating design
sheet containing a subset of PC-IMDs
parameters. See WinSPEED manual.
Tabbed design sheet Ctrl+Shift+F4 Design sheet divided into tabbed pages
Phasor diagram Ctrl+A Display and analyse the phasor diagram
Torque/Speed graphs Variation of torque, current and other
parameters over a range of speed at fixed
supply voltage
Torque/Speed summary Summary of parameters obtained from the
torque/speed calculation
Line Start waveforms Line-start transient waveforms
Drive simulation
waveforms
Drive simulation waveforms
No Load graphs Variation of flux-density and other
parameters at zero slip, as the supply
voltage is varied
Thermal plot Graphs of thermal transient (Hot10, Hot16)
Eigenvalue plot Root locus diagram resulting from eigenvalue
analysis
Tools (See WinSPEED manual).
Equivalent circuit
diagram
Ctrl+E Display, edit, and recalculate the
equivalent circuit
Scripting F7 Open the script editor
Units converter Utility for converting units
Calculator F4 Simple arithmetic operations on PC-IMDs
parameters
Steel database Ctrl+5 Open the Steel Database Manager for editing
or creating records of steel data
GoFER (FE link) F11 Finite-element link via the GDF
FE Results Windows for importing finite-element results
into PC-IMD to match and compare with PC-
IMDs internal calculations
Export data Data transfer to other programs
MotorCAD Link to MotorCAD (thermal analysis program)
Page 10 Data | Outline editor PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 6 Outline editor.
2.1 Outline Editor [Ctrl+1]
The outline editor is for editing the motor geometry, particularly the cross-section
and the axial dimensions. The precise meanings of the dimensions are defined in 3
and illustrated in the reference diagrams.
When you change a parameter, PC-IMD checks the validity of the new value. If the
data is invalid, an error message appears and the drawing disappears. Unfortunately
this may deprive you of visual clues as to what is wrong, so it is advisable to
proceed cautiously and make careful changes, starting with a valid design.
The cross-section can be copied to the Windows clipboard using [Ctrl+C]. The zoom
function is described in the WinSPEED manual. Use [F8] to change the appearance of
the display. [F6] switches the colours to black/white.
Use File*Information [Ctrl+I] to display "spreadsheet parameters" such as slot area,
coil area, etc.
Use Edit View to display other views (including axial cross-section). The red line
is the reference axis of the rotor. RoShift sets the angle of the rotor axis in
Emech relative to the x-axis.
When the outline editor is open, the main menu has an Outline menu with various
options for controlling the display. The zoom is controlled either by the mouse or
by the zoom dialog [Ctrl+Z]; see the WinSPEED manual. Use [F8] to change the
colours, fonts, fills etc..
The outline can be copied to the Windows clipboard using [Ctrl+C]. To print the
outline, use File*Print or [Ctrl+P]. To create a .DXF file, use the GDF editor
[F11], or Tools|Export Data|Lamination as DXF.
PC-IMD 9.04 Data | Outline editor Page 11
Fig. 7 Outline editor with Edit View = Axial section, and NSDuct = NRDuct = 6. The left-
hand end-ring has ERtype1 = Type A and the right-hand end-ring has ERtype2 =
TypeC.
Fig. 8 Outline editor with Edit View = Rotor slot and Outline | Show slot points.
Page 12 Data | Outline editor PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 9 Rotor reference coil
Rotor reference coil
Fig. 10 shows the rotor reference coil used with Analysis | Drive simulation when Drive
= Direct. (See Fig. 27 on p. 27). The primitive matrices of rotor inductance and
resistance treat the rotor as having R_Bars coils, each spanning a single tooth. The
first of these is shown in the outline editor (set Outline | Show rotor reference coil).
The [R] key aligns the axis of the rotor reference coil with the axis of phase 1.
The [A] key aligns the rotor reference axis with the axis of phase 1. The reference
axis is not the axis of the first coil, but the axis of the zeroth rotor slot. It
is shown by the red line.
In Fig. 10 the axis of phase 1 is at Ax1md = 52@5E. The axis of the first rotor coil
is at Ax1md when the red-line axis is half a rotor slot-pitch back (clockwise) from
that position, and since R_Bars = 19, this gives RoShift = Ax1md - 360/2/R_Bars =
52@5 - 360/2/19 = 43@0263E, as shown.
As to why there should appear to be two rotor reference axes, the red-line reference
axis is significant for the finite-element GoFER, whereas the first-coil axis is
significant for the matrix analysis and the transient simulation.
PC-IMD 9.04 Data*Template editor Page 13
Fig. 10 The template editor, Ted
2.2 Template editor, Ted [Ctrl+3]
Ted contains all the input parameters of the motor and control, except the
dimensional parameters that appear in the outline editor. For parameter
definitions, see 3. Ted does no error-checking, so any errors or inconsistencies
will not show up until an Analysis is run.
A Selectingmaterials[Ctrl+M]
The materials associated with the current design datafile can be selected using
Data*Materials [Ctrl+M]. They are not displayed in Ted. When the file is saved, the
material selection is also saved, and it will be recovered when the file is next re-
opened, provided that the materials database has not been removed.
B Units[Ctrl+U]
Units for input/output can be selected using Data*I/OUnits [Ctrl+U]. Default units for
new designs can be selected by Options | Default Units.
The template editor can be copied to the Windows clipboard using [Ctrl+C]. To
print the template editor, use File*Print or [Ctrl+P].
Page 14 Data*Winding editor PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 11 Winding editor, showing an example of a standard winding type, "ConcEqual"
in which all coils have equal numbers of turns. For hard copy, follow the
same procedure as for the outline editor. Use [Ctrl+P] to print.
2.3 Winding Editor [Ctrl+W]
The winding editor screen is divided into three sections. On the right-hand side the
graphical winding display has six tabbed pages: One phase, All phases, MMF,
Harmonics, Winding factors, and Grges. The bottom left-hand section is a table of
parameters. The top left section shows the coil-list table and other data.
A Onephase
The coil list table (at top left) shows the Go and Return conductors of every coil
in the selected phase, coloured differently to highlight the N/S polarities of the
winding. The Go and Return slot numbers and the Span and the Turns for any coil can
be edited by moving the cursor to the selected parameter and entering the new value.
Any change to a standard winding causes the winding type to change to Custom. The
currently selected coil can be deleted using the [Del]ete key. A new coil can be
inserted into the winding using the [Ins]ert key.
Parameters (These can be entered or edited using [F2]).
WdgType Winding type: see below.
CnsqPole Selects consequent-pole winding.
TC Turns/coil (non-custom windings). If a new value is entered while
WdgType = Custom, all coils will be reset to the new value of TC.
CPP Coils per pole-group (standard windings only).
Offset Offset in slot-pitches between phase winding starts (only for
FracSlot and Custom winding types).
Throw Span of widest coil in any pole-group (standard windings only).
Phase Selects which phase to display.
Harmonic Selects which harmonic to display.
PC-IMD 9.04 Data*Winding editor Page 15
1
Unsymmetric windings obtained with BalWdg = false are still under development, as is the Grges page.
2
In addition to the layout parameters mentioned above, a full winding specification also includes the
parameters WdgType, POLES, SLOTS, NSH, PPATHS, Ext, WireSpec, Gauge, Wire, Liner and Endfill. (See 3).
Fig. 12 An example of a 48-slot stator with a 4-pole Concentric winding with Throw
= 11 and CPP = 4, and a 48-slot stator with a 4-pole Lap winding also with
Throw = 11 and CPP = 4. Only one phase is shown. The polarities of
adjacent coil-groups are, of course, opposite.
The winding editor can be used for visualizing the effect of changes in the Throw,
CPP (coils/pole) and other parameters. It can also be used for creating new, custom
winding distributions from scratch. When the winding is modified, PC-IMD keeps
account of the coilside locations and the numbers of turns in each coil, and
displays this data in the coil list table. The coil list is used to calculate the
resistance, inductances, winding factors, etc.
Winding types (WdgType) A "winding" in PC-IMD is a phase winding. In polyphase
motors, all the phase windings are assumed to be identical, except for their
orientation.
1
In split-phase motors there is a main phase and an auxiliary phase.
PC-IMD supports six winding types. All except the Custom type can be "assembled"
automatically from parameters specified in Ted or in the winding editor.
ConcEqual Concentric with equal turns/coil
ConcSine Concentric with sine-distributed turns/coil
ConcUser Concentric; only one pole-group is specified and
the others are copied from it
Lap Integral-slot lap winding
FracSlot Fractional-slot winding
Custom Fully editable winding layout
Definition of standard windings Standard winding types are defined by TC
(Turns/Coil); CPP (Coils per pole); and Throw.
2
For ConcEqual and ConcSine types,
Throw is the span of the outermost coil in each pole-group, measured in slot-
pitches; for Lap and FracSlot types, Throw is the span of every coil. A coil with
coilsides in slots 1 and 6 has Throw = 5, i.e., a span of 5 slot-pitches.
Fig. 13 Fractional-slot winding with 27 slots and 4 poles
Offset '
2
3
Slots
Poles
k
Slots
p
(2)
Offset '
2
3
27
4
1
27
2
' 18.
(3)
Offset '
2
3
Slots
Poles
.
(1)
A fractional-slot winding is one that has non-integral slots/pole. An example is
shown in Fig. 14 with 27 slots and 4 poles. With WdgType = Fracslot, the coil-
placement algorithm used by PC-IMD will find, at most, only one of an infinite
number of possible windings. The range of possible configurations is too great to
formulate with automatic algorithms, which is why we have the Custom winding type.
Offset is the number of slot-pitches between the start of phase 1 and the start of
phase 2. For three-phase motors the phase displacement is normally 120 Eelec, so
If Slots/Poles is an integral multiple of the number of phases, the result is an
integer, and for ConcEqual, ConcSine, ConcUser and Lap windings it is automatic.
For FracSlot windings, a recommended value of Offset is calculated automatically,
but it is often necessary to adjust it. The easiest way to adjust it is by using
the Grges diagram to check the phase sequence (see below); then the All phases view
should be used to check that all the slots have the same number of conductors. The
search for a correct value of Offset is a matter of advancing the start of phase 2
until the correct phase sequence is found, and the Grges diagram is the best view
for this operation. In effect we are searching for k such that
is an integer, where p = Poles/2. For example with 24 slots and 4 poles, 2/3 24/4
' 4 which is already an integer, so k ' 0 and Offset ' 4. But suppose Slots ' 27
and Poles ' 4. Then we can find k ' 1 such that
This is equivalent to Offset ' 9. We must be careful to distinguish between +9 and
9; an Offset of +9 would give a 120E phase displacement but the wrong phase
sequence. More is written on this in connection with the Grges diagram, below.
Offset is checked before Analysis is run, and PC-IMD displays a warning message if
it detects an incorrect value. However, the detection of "incorrect" or non-
feasible windings is not foolproof, so visual checking is recommended.
B CustomWindings
Custom windings may be "assembled" with any coil layout. They should be treated with
caution, bearing in mind the limitations of the equivalent-circuit models of the
induction motor, which are generally restricted to the fundamental flux and perhaps
a limited number of its harmonics. Custom windings can be specified only via the
winding editor; they cannot be specified in Ted. The term "custom winding" embraces
all possible distributions of coils. If you start to modify a standard winding (by
adding, removing or editing coils), PC-IMD reclassifies the winding to type Custom.
When entering new custom windings, it is advisable to follow PC-IMD's slot numbering
and work from a winding diagram if one is available. Pay attention to coil polarity
and location as winding errors can be difficult to detect. The MMF page provides
a supplementary means for checking the winding distribution; see below.
For custom windings it is necessary to enter the entire winding of one phase. There
is no automatic way to replicate the coil-groups for successive poles, but there are
some short-cuts (on the Winding menu) to flip or rotate coils. Sometimes a custom
winding can be built by minor modifications to a standard winding. Normally, the
coils of successive N and S poles are entered with opposite polarity. The user must
find the correct slot numbers to make this the case.
Beware of duplicate coils having the same Go and Return slot numbers: they may be
visually indistinguishable. Use the menu item Check for duplicate and zero-span coils.
Both balanced and unbalanced windings can be constructed in the winding editor. If
BalWdg = true, the second and third phases will be identical to the first, except
for their positions which are defined by Offset. If BalWdg ' false, then all the
phases must be entered individually. The commonest case of an unbalanced winding
is the Split-phase winding, which has a main and an auxiliary phase.
Fig. 14 All phases page of winding editor.
C Allphases
This tabbed page displays all the coils of all phases. The coil list table shows,
for each slot, the number of conductors for each phase, the total number of
conductors, and two fill factors. SFg is the ratio of total copper cross section in
the slot to Aslot. SFn is obtained by multiplying d
2
for every strand by the total
number of strands in the slot, and dividing by the slot area depleted by the area
of the liner and any wedges and phase separators, where d is the diameter of each
strand measured across the wire insulation. See Fig. 97. The maximum slot-fill
factor is highlighted in red.
Fig. 15 MMF page of Winding editor
D MMF
The MMF page shows a graph of the MMF across the airgap, constructed under the
assumptions that the steel is infinitely permeable and the stator windings are
represented by current filaments on a smooth-bore cylinder at angles corresponding
to the centre-lines of their respective slots.
The MMF can be displayed for the selected Phase, or for all phases combined, as in
Fig. 16. It can also be scaled in ampere-conductors, per-unit, or percent.
Harmonic is the order of a space-harmonic component of the displayed MMF
distribution. The harmonic order can be defined as "electrical" or "mechanical".
For example Fig. 16 shows the electrical fundamental of the ConcEqual 24-slot 4-pole
winding of Fig. 12, showing the airgap MMF of all phases acting together, with 1.0
p.u. current in phase 1 and !0.5 p.u. current in phases 2 and 3. The sinewave in
Fig. 16 is the second "mechanical" harmonic because the winding is a 4-pole winding.
The MMF distribution and its harmonics are plotted versus the actual azimuthal angle
around the airgap, measured in slot-pitches. This method of display is useful for
showing subharmonics in the MMF distribution which can arise with certain custom or
fractional-slot windings. When examining MMF plots, the number of pole-pairs should
always be borne in mind for this reason.
Poles changes the azimuthal extent of the graph, not the actual number of poles in
the motor. The number of harmonics is set internally to 100.
The slider at top right progresses the waveform in time. When Phase ' 1, 2, or 3
the waveform pulsates but its axis remains fixed. When Phase ' All, the waveform
advances. This provides a graphic demonstration of the production of a "rotating
magnetic field". For a 3-phase motor, if Harmonic = 1,5 ... 6k 1, ... the
progression is forwards (i.e., in the same direction as the slider). If Harmonic
' 7,13, ... 6k 1, ... the progression is reversed. For 2-phase motors equivalent
relationships are observed.
The MMF page also displays a table at upper left showing the relative ampere-
conductors in each slot, with the contributions from each phase displayed
separately.
Fig. 16 Harmonics page of the Winding editor
Fig. 17 Winding Factors page of the Winding editor
E HarmonicsandWindingFactors
The Harmonics page (Fig. 17) displays the actual spectrum of the waveform displayed
in Fig. 16. The spectrum is computed by an exact closed-form Fourier analysis.
The Winding menu provides several display options. For example, the table can
display the harmonic coefficients in cartesian form (A = cosine coefficient; B =
sine coefficient); or in polar form (R, ). Null harmonics can be hidden.
The scale can be in ampere-conductors (based on 1 A in phase 1), or in per-unit or
in percent. The mathematics of the normalization is given in detail in SEM-3.
Harmonics can also be plotted with the square of the magnitude. If Closed slots is
unchecked in the Winding menu, the harmonics are modulated with a Sin (n)/(n)
function representing the effect of the slot-openings.
The harmonic spectrum should not be confused with the Winding Factors, which involve
a further normalization to the harmonic spectrum of a full-pitch winding, Fig. 18.
3
R-Y-B was for many decades the standard colouring of cables and identification of phases in the UK
system. In Germany it would be R-S-T or U-V-W, and in the United States A-B-C or 1-2-3. All of these
systems have a logical order and would be meaningful to electricians : in the case of R-Y-B these colours
are in order of their appearance in the rainbow, which is fortunately not at the disposal of bureaucrats.
It is possible that new EU regulations will throw this into confusion. SPEED cannot anticipate the
unpredictable edicts of the bureaucracy, and in any case SPEED is used far beyond the confines of the
EU, but we can and must remind our gentle readers to be careful about phase sequence.
Fig. 18 Grges page of the Winding editor
F Grgesdiagram
The Grges page shows an elementary form of the Grges diagram [4]. It can display
MMF vectors or EMF phasors of the individual coils in the entire winding, in the
correct phase relationship.
It is very useful for checking the phase sequence. With EMF checked, the phasors
rotate in the positive direction, anti-clockwise. An observer as shown in Fig. 19
will see the EMF phasors pass by in the order
3
RED YELLOW BLUE
With MMF checked, the vectors are fixed in space, and the order appears to be
reversed. They are positioned such that a flux rotating in the positive (anti-
clockwise) direction will pass the fixed locations in the order Red Yellow Blue.
The Grges diagram has several display options including Symmetrical components.
This displays the positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence components of the EMF
phasors. A balanced winding should have only a positive-sequence component.
Page 22 Analysis*Steady state analysis PC-IMD 9.04
2.4 Steady state analysis [Ctrl+2]
Steady-state analysis is the calculation of the equivalent-circuit parameters and
the performance of the motor under the conditions defined according to CalcMode in
Ted, i.e., at constant speed with a particular value of supply voltage, torque, etc.
The calculation has two sections:
1. calculation of the equivalent-circuit parameters from the geometry, the
winding layout, and the various material properties of the laminations,
conductors, etc.
2. calculation of the performance from the equivalent circuit, including
auxiliary calculations of core loss, windage, retaining can losses, load
torque, etc.
The results of both parts of the calculation are available in the design sheet and
in various graphs and diagrams. The speed of calculation depends on the selected
calculation methods for various parameters (such as deep bar effect and differential
leakage reactance).
Input data is specified in several editors in the Data menu, including the outline
editor, the winding editor, and the template editor. Results are generally obtained
through the Results menu.
PC-IMD 9.04 Analysis | Torque/speed characteristic Page 23
Fig. 19 Torque/speed curve.
2.5 Torque/speed characteristic
The torque/speed curve can be plotted together with other graphs such as power or
efficiency vs. speed or load. It is plotted over a range of slip from TSmin to
TSmax (Ted/2). The table shows typical examples. To expand the curve in the normal
load region, for example, set TSmin = 0, TSmax = 0@2.
Tsmin (min. slip) Tsmax (max. slip)
Normal motoring range 0 1
Braking 1 2
Motoring and braking 0 2
Generating !1 0
If EQcct = SPEED (Ted/2), the calculation uses the standard equivalent circuit; only
the fundamental space-harmonic of the stator MMF distribution is used. If EQcct =
Alger, the calculation is performed using Algers equivalent circuit and includes
harmonic torques (augmented with the 11th and 13th phasebelt harmonics, which are
not shown). The effect of saturation is included at each slip.
Use Graph|Display to select the graphs to be plotted. Further customization of the
display is possible using Graph|Grid, Zero, Legend, Auto scale, per-unit y-axis, Options and Edit
Graph when the torque/speed graph is displayed. If Auto scale is unchecked, the axes
remain unchanged when the calculation is repeated.
If Graph| Show steady-state points is checked, the operating point is marked if Analysis|Steady-
state analysis [Ctrl+2]is performed while the torque/speed curve is displayed; see Fig.
20. Other points (locked rotor, breakdown, etc. can be displayed according to the
value of TorqCalc (q.v.).
The calculation of the torque/speed characteristic can include the adiabatic
temperature rise in the rotor bars (ATR_bar) and end-rings (ATR_ER1 and ATR_ER2).
It is also necessary for this calculation to set TSmin = 1 and TSmax = 0 so that the
temperature rise is calculated for a normal starting transient starting at zero
speed and running up to normal speed. (The default values of TSmin and TSmax are the
other way round! 0 and 1).
The torque/speed curves also show the effect of wye/delta starting, and the effect
of switching the auxiliary impedance in a split-phase or capacitor-start motor.
Page 24 Analysis*Line start calculation PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 20 Starting transient, Analysis*Line start calculation [Ctrl+L]
2.6 Line start calculation
PC-IMD calculates the starting transient by two different methods, (see p. 50):
! When St. Calc = dqR or dqS, it integrates the differential circuit equations
in a time-stepping process, using fixed resistances and inductances derived
from the per-phase values in the standard equivalent circuit. This method
includes the transient DC offset in the line current waveforms, so it shows
the torque oscillations that occur in real life. It is possible to model non-
simultaneous closure of the poles of the contactor; or point-on-wave switching
of two SCRs in a soft-starter, which can be used to suppress the torque
oscillation. (See th1, th2).
The line-start transient solves the differential circuit equations together
with the mechanical equations of motion. The integration timestep is equal
to dt = StartTime/(2048 ISLA), where St.Time is the specified duration of
the starting transient and ISLA is the integration step-length adjustment. A
general guide is to try to make dt correspond to 1Eelec or less, which at 50Hz
corresponds to dt = 0.056ms. Therefore for St.Time = 10s, ISLA should be set
to 10/2048/0.056 10
!3
= 87, or in round numbers 100. Only every ISLAth
point is stored for plotting.
! When St. Calc = Qstatic, it computes a series of "quasi-static" operating
points throughout the speed range, and joins them up by computing the time
taken to accelerate from one point to the next. This time-honoured method
used to be executed "by hand". It has the advantage of including the variation
of impedances due to saturation and deep-bar effect
The load inertia (JL) can be varied. The initial firing angles in a soft-starter
can be adjusted to see the effect of point-on-wave switching..
PC-IMD 9.04 Analysis | Drive simulation Page 25
Fig. 21 Drive simulation waveforms, Analysis|Drive simulation [Ctrl+D]
Fig. 22 Current waveforms with PWM drive Fig. 23 Flux-linkage/current loops
2.7 Drive Simulation [Ctrl+D]
PC-IMD simulates one electrical cycle of operation with various Drive options
including sinewave AC voltage, six-step inverter, PWM inverter, and AC series
controller. Fig. 22 shows a typical set of simulation waveforms of line-line
voltage, line current, and torque vs. rotor position for a PWM drive. The
fundamental components of the voltage and current are also shown.
The simulation is performed at constant speed (set by rpm, or by frequency and slip,
depending on the value of CalcMode). The differential equations are solved in dq
axes fixed to the rotor, and there are two stator voltage equations and two rotor
voltage equations. The parameters are fixed, and are derived from the equivalent-
circuit parameters calculated at the load-point specified in the normal way for
Analysis | Steady-state analysis [Ctrl+2] at the AC line-line supply voltage Vs. The
iron-loss resistor is not included in the simulation equations, so iron losses are
not included in the simulation. Similarly, stray-load loss is not included.
Fig. 23 shows the set of three-phase current waveforms and Fig. 24 shows the i-psi
loops (flux-linkage/current loops) corresponding to Fig. 22.

Page 26 Analysis | Drive simulation PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 24 Electric circuit used in Drive simulation
Fig. 25 AC series controller circuit, used when Drive = ACSC.
Fig. 25 shows the electric circuit used in Drive simulation when Drive = 6-Step or
PWM. The transistors and diodes are modelled as ideal switches. The DC supply is
modelled as a battery voltage Vdc with a resistance Rdc. The simulation results
include the mean DC current IDCwfm computed from the current waveforms in the phase-
legs, and the mean DC voltage VdcMean = Vdc Rdc IDCwfm. The Drive simulation
is controlled by the parameters Drive, ModStrat, mIndex, CFrq, and BreakIT (q.v.).
Output parameters are detailed on p. 137. Note that PC-IMD makes no allowance for
additional losses caused by PWM or non-sinusoidal current or voltage waveforms,
though this will be added in a future version.
Fig. 26 shows the electric circuit used in Drive simulation when Drive = ACSC (AC
series controller). The control parameter is the firing angle of the thyristors
SCR1 and SCR2, alpha.
PC-IMD 9.04 Analysis | Drive simulation Page 27
Fig. 26 Simulation waveforms when Drive = Direct
Matrix analysis of the induction machine
Fig. 27 shows simulation waveforms obtained with Analysis | Drive simulation when Drive
= Direct. The graphs include the three phase voltages, the three phase currents,
the current in the first rotor coil, and the electromagnetic torque.
This simulation uses a matrix analysis (described in SEM-3) which begins with the
calculation of primitive inductance and resistance matrices for every stator coil
and every rotor coil. The primitive matrices are reduced by connection matrices
according to the connection and type of winding. Then the simulation proceeds by
integrating the circuit differential equations using the Runge-Kutta 4
th
order
method.
The circuit equations are written in ordinary phase variables : the dq-axis is of
no use in this case because the inductances do not vary sinusoidally with rotor
position. Indeed it is the harmonics in the variation of certain of the inductances
that gives rise to harmonic torques, which are not observable in a dq-axis model.
The primitive impedance matrix is recalculated from the machine parameters and
winding data, every main integration step. No allowance is made for saturation.
This simulation is controlled by the parameters DSimType, DSimData, WriteMX,
BreakIT, RotState, Vs and ISLA.
Page 28 Analysis | Eigenvalue analysis PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 27 Root locus diagram showing the poles of the characteristic equation over a speed
range at constant V/Hz
2.8 Eigenvalue analysis
The eigenvalues are the roots of the characteristic equation and define the natural
response of the motor to small disturbances. Five eigenvalues are calculated for
the motor. The main function of the eigenvalue calculation is to assess the
stability when operating from an open-loop variable-frequency inverter with constant
volts/Hz. Typically there is a range of speeds (between 0@1 and 0@3 of normal
synchronous speed) in which the damping is light or negative, [10]. With vector-
controlled drives this type of analysis is not necessary.
PC-IMD 9.04 Analysis * No-load calculation Page 29
Fig. 28 Airgap flux distribution and its fundamental
2.9 No-load calculation
The no-load calculation simulates the no-load test, with the main objective of
obtaining values for the magnetizing reactance Xm and core-loss resistance Rc
(including the effect of saturation). The machine is assumed to be driven at
synchronous speed by a separate drive motor. Windage and friction losses are
supplied by the drive machine, so Wf0 is automatically set to zero and the ANSI C.50
method is used for stray load losses, (resulting in WSLL=0). The no-load
calculation can also be used to simulate a normal no-load test (with the machine
running at very low slip) by adjusting the No-load calculation Parameters in Ted.
Two alternative methods are available for computing the magnetic circuit on no-load.
The "classical" method is an implementation of the 60E method [2,3]. The other
method has been developed at the SPEED Laboratory [18]. The results of the no-load
calculation can be viewed in the design sheet, "No-load Magnetic design". The
results in this section depend on the magnetic circuit computational method.
After running a no-load calculation with MagCalc = SPEED, graphs are available:
1 The distribution of the air-gap flux density and its fundamental over
90Eelec. This graph is computed assuming that only the fundamental MMF
is exciting the equivalent magnetic circuit.
2 The air-gap flux density over 360Eelec., modulated by stator slot
harmonics. The effect of the rotor slot opening is ignored, on the
assumption (appropriate for small and medium-size machines) that the
rotor slots are closed or have a very small slot opening.
3 The flux-density distribution in the stator/rotor teeth (red) and yoke
(blue).
4 The flux density in the stator/rotor teeth and yoke as functions of the
stator phase angle (2 Freq t) and the rotor phase angle (2 Freq
Slip t). (Of course the rotor waveforms are valid only if the slip
is very small but different from zero).
After running a no-load calculation with MagCalc = Classical, no graphs are
available. Although the "60E method" makes some allowance for the third saturation
harmonics, the airgap flux distribution is not calculated in detail.
Note that the warning message "DBg[k] < 0" may arise in highly saturated motors.
This means that a negative value of the B
gap
distribution has been detected, usually
at the extreme right-hand edge of Fig. 29. Usually the negative value is very small
and can be ignored.
Page 30 Analysis*No-load calculation PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 29 No-load ranging options
Fig. 30 No-load ranging results
2.10 No-load (ranging Vs)
The no-load calculation can be computed over a range of values of supply voltage Vs
with the motor rotating at synchronous speed. The voltage range and the number of
steps are shown in Fig. 30.
The results are available in the design sheet, which can be used to plot graphs.
Of particular interest is the no-load current as a function of terminal voltage, and
an example is shown in Fig. 31. This example shows the voltage/current relationship
at synchronous speed, and is sometimes called the "no-load saturation curve".

The no-load saturation curve is also available in the MatchFE : No-load window for
comparison with the no-load saturation curve obtained by finite-elements using the
GoFER. (See page 38).
PC-IMD 9.04 Analysis | Ranging Page 31
2.11 Ranging (Batch design) [Ctrl+B]
Ranging is the calculation of a batch of designs or cases, in which a number of
parameters are stepped through a series of values. The design sheets are available
for all steps, and graphs can be plotted showing the variation of any parameter
against any other parameter. Ranging is intended to assist in the selection of an
optimum value for one or more parameters. It is described in the WinSPEED manual.
A variation range can be assigned to an individual parameter using [Ctrl+R] in Ted,
or in the outline editor. Note that Ranging has no intelligence: it merely grinds
out a repetitive series of calculations very quickly and presents the results
efficiently.
LogFile The name of the ASCII file in which selected ranging results will be
automatically written after running a ranging calculation. The names
of the parameters of interest must be listed in an unformatted ASCII
text file called LOGVARS.TXT in the PC-IMD directory. In this file you
can specify any PC-IMD variable. There must be only one variable on
each line, identified by its name exactly as it appears in Ted and/or
the design sheet. This facility is useful if results from large
comparative studies have to be tabulated or plotted outside SPEED
software.
Page 32 Results*Design sheet PC-IMD 9.04
4
For the help line to display, the mouse cursor must be used to select the parameter
Fig. 31 A section of the design sheet
2.12 Design sheet [Ctrl+4]
The design sheet shows all the input and output design parameters, and their
relevant units. The complete design sheet is opened with [Ctrl+4]. A tabbed-page
version is opened with [Ctrl+Shift+F4] (Fig. 32).
Use the [8],[9] keys or the mouse to scroll through the data. The help line
displays information about the highlighted parameter.
4
The parameters are described
in 3. On the screen, input and output parameters have different colours, which can
be changed using Design sheet|options [F8].
Hard copy of the design sheet can be obtained using File*Print [Ctrl+P] from within
the design sheet. Alternatively, [Ctrl+C] can be used to copy the window to the
clipboard. The design sheet can also be saved to a text (.txt) or Rich Text Format
(.rtf) file using Design sheet*Save design sheet.
The calculator [F4] accepts arithmetic expressions such as Power/746. For
parameters with names containing punctuation marks, use double quotes, e.g. "T/Wt".
PC-IMD 9.04 Results | Custom design sheet Page 33
5
Check the release disk for *.DSS files to see an example.
2.13 Custom design sheet
A custom design sheet can be set up by first creating a template file using a text
editor.
5
It should have the filename extension .DSS. It can contain 4 main types
of formatting information: plain text, predefined sections, standard variables and
user-defined expressions. Any number of template files may be created; PC-IMD uses
the one specified in Options*General*Custom design sheet. The custom design sheet
can be displayed whenever the main design sheet is available. It has all the same
features as the main design sheet including the calculator [F4] and printing
facilities.
The syntax of the custom design sheet is described in the WinSPEED manual. The
custom design sheet can include predefined sections from the normal design sheet by
entering the specific section name on a separate line in the .DSS template file.
The section names are those used in the design sheet, preceded by the @ symbol:
@DIMENSIONS
@CONTROL DATA
@WINDING DATA
@MAGNETIC DESIGN
@EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PARAMETERS
@PERFORMANCE
@CORE LOSSES
@MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
@USER DEFINED FORMULA
@RATEDANDPARTIALLOADPERFORMANCE
@THERMAL DATA
@COIL LOCATIONS
@CONDUCTOR LOCATIONS
Page 34 Results*Phasor diagram PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 32 Phasor diagram
2.14 Phasor diagram [Ctrl+A]
The phasor diagram displays phase currents and voltages in ordinary units or
normalized units (per-unit) expressed in cartesian or polar form. Use the Argand
menu to make changes.
Using the tree structure, individual phasors can be switched on or off, in order to
customize the display. The cursor keys select one phasor at a time, highlighting
it and activating a label on the phasor itself for identification. At the same time
the name of the selected phasor is highlighted in the left-hand panel, alongside its
current value. [Spacebar] can be used to switch a phasor on or off.
For polyphase machines, the reference phasor is the terminal voltage of phase 1, V1.
For split-phase motors the phasor diagram includes forward and backward components
of current and voltage, to show the degree of unbalance between the main and
auxiliary phases.

PC-IMD 9.04 Results*Phasor diagram Page 35
Fig. 33 Thermal graphs showing temperature-vs-time
2.15 Thermal graphs
Transient thermal graphs such as those in Fig. 34 are calculated in Analysis | Steady-
state analysis when TempCalc ' Hot10 or Hot16. Parameters are described in 3.2. The
thermal models are shown in Figs. 110 and 111 on pp. 175 and 175.
Each of the graphs in Fig. 34 is plotted with only 120 "plotting points" or samples,
to save time and memory. In most cases the graphs will be smooth, but there may be
a little angularity near the left-hand end, as is just discernible in Fig. 34. A
smooth rendering of that part of the graph can be obtained by running the
calculation again with a reduced value of hTime, which has the effect of zooming in,
but with a smaller time interval between points. Apart from its duration, the
calculation of the transient is not affected by hTime or by any other graph
settings: it uses thm_dt for the integration time-step.
Page 36 Tools | Equivalent circuit diagram PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 34 Equivalent-circuit diagram
Fig. 35 Equivalent circuit Options [F8]
2.16 Equivalent circuit diagram [Ctrl+E]
The equivalent circuit diagram displays the impedances in the equivalent circuit of
one phase, together with the voltages and currents in all branches. For split-phase
motors, one phase of the equivalent balanced 2-phase motor is used. The impedance
values can be edited. Recalculation is automatic following a parameter change.
Changes made in the equivalent-circuit diagram are local: they are not transferred
to Ted or to the design sheet. Consequently they have no effect on the design of the
motor. The results can be printed using [Ctrl+P].
If a steady-state analysis has not been run, the equivalent-circuit diagram parameters are
initialized to the values inherited from the last time the equivalent circuit
diagram was activated. Eq.Cct|Options [F8] can be used to specify additional
parameters that are not part of the equivalent circuit, so that an original motor
model can be created independently of the current design file.
If Update from design sheet is checked, the parameters in the equivalent-circuit editor
are updated from the current design when a Steady-state analysis is run [Ctrl+2].
PC-IMD 9.04 Tools | Equivalent circuit diagram Page 37
Fig. 36 DXF Export
Input and output data
92 0
Program: PC-IMD 4.1
Date: 080409
Version: 4.1.0.0.E
Written: 11-Apr-2008 11:47:52
1 0.000000
2 Comment
3 Title PC-IMD main title
4 SubTitle PC-IMD sub-title
5 RadSh 6.000000 mm
6 Rad1 25.000000 mm
7 Gap 0.200000 mm
8 Poles 4
9 Rad3 50.000000 mm
10 Slots 24
11 S-slot Round
12 SO_S 1.500000 mm
13 SD_S 14.000000 mm
14 TW_S 3.000000 mm
15 TGD_S 1.000000 mm
16 TGANG_S 40.000000 mDeg
17 Lstk 50.000000 mm
18 Stf 0.970000
19 Liner 0.400000 mm
20 BalWdg true
21 PPaths 1
22 TC 160
23 Throw 5
24 CPP 2.000000
25 NSH_1 1
26 AuxPaths 1
27 AuxTC 160
28 AuxThrow 5
2.17 Export data
Tools|Export is for exporting data from PC-IMD to other programs. One of the most
useful functions is the export of .dxf files to mechanical CAD programs, Fig. 37.
Units can be in inches or mm, and closed regions or plain lines can be exported.
Another useful facility is the export of "all data as text", to a text file *.stv.
An fragment of such a file is shown below.
Example of *.stv file obtained with Tools|Export
For further details see the WinSPEED manual.
Page 38 Tools | GoFER (FE link) PC-IMD 9.04
6
Finite-element interfaces and links are liable to change from time to time, and the extent of automation
differs for different finite-element programs; therefore the documentation is in separate notes. Please
consult the SPEED Laboratory for details, or for up-to-date information on the GDF Editor..
Fig. 37 GoFER (FE link) [F11]
2.18 GoFER (FE Link) [F11]
The automatic creation of script files for finite-element programs saves preparation
time and makes the finite-element method more accessible and useful than if the
model had to be constructed "manually". PC-IMD helps to automate the process by
preparing the data for mesh generation, in conjunction with the GDF Editor program.
It permits the user to define the numbers of nodes (and their bias or distribution)
on every edge of every region in the model, thus giving close control over the mesh
building before passing control to a finite-element analysis program such as PC-FEA.
"GoFER" literally means "go to finite-elements and return", and [F11] displays a
dialog box for selecting the particular finite-element calculation required: for
example, a flux plot at a single operating point. The options in this dialog box
are intended to be self-explanatory, and are liable to change from time to time as
options are added or improved. The dialog box is called the finite-element GoFER.
Detailed operation of the GoFER with PC-IMD is described in the PC-IMD GoFER manual.
Some examples are shown in Figs. 3942 on page 39.
The FE link is designed to operate via the GDF Editor (see WinSPEED and PC-
FEA manuals). The most usual option is "Edit using GDF Editor". This causes PC-IMD
to write the necessary link files, and the GDF Editor automatically opens with a
display of the geometry, divided into subdomains, with the boundary nodes shown in
all subdomains. The spacing of boundary nodes can be edited in the GDF Editor, in
preparation for meshing. The GDF Editor can then write appropriate command files
for the finite-element program PC-FEA and for a number of commercial FE programs.
Some commercial finite-element programs can read .GDF files directly. The .GDF file
format is designed for users and FE program suppliers to create their own links to
SPEED software.
6
PC-IMD 9.04 Tools | GoFER (FE Link) Page 39
Fig. 38 Flux Plot; Single load point
Fig. 39 Airgap flux distribution
Fig. 40 Slot permeance GoFER
Fig. 41 No-load saturation curve computed by finite elements
for comparison with PC-IMD
Typical results from the finite-element GoFER
Page 40 Input parameters*Outline editor PC-IMD 9.04
3. Reference section
Parameter definitions are grouped by the operations where they are first seen:
3.1 Input parameters first seen in the outline editor;
3.2 Input parameters first seen in Ted;
3.3 Output parameters first seen in the design sheet.
Parameters are described roughly in order of appearance in each section. Units are
default units. For dimensions see the reference diagrams. Default values are
enclosed in braces {} or are underlined. For alphabetic listing, see the main
index. Use [spacebar] or [F2] to edit non-numeric parameters.
PC-IMD 9.04 Input parameters | Outline editor Page 41
7
The TGang convention is the original one used in PC-IMD and in early versions of PC-BDC. For some
reason the SOang convention was suddenly adopted in PC-BDC 4, throwing matters into a state of mild
confusion that has lasted to the present day. It is true that some forms of slot are more easily
specified in terms of the tooth-geometry, and vice versa, but such wisdom is not programmed into PC-
IMD or PC-BDC except in certain cases such as the GolfTee tooth (slot) in PC-BDC.
3.1 Input parameters (Outline Editor)
3.1.1 OutlineEditor
The following parameters are visible for most values of Edit View. Dimensions of
individual slots, bars, end-rings and frame are defined in the reference diagrams.
MConfig Motor configuration.
Int Interior-rotor; cage type.
Ext Exterior-rotor; cage type. Exchange RadSh and Rad3.
WR Wound rotor. (Interior-rotor only)
RadSh Shaft radius. See Fig. 80.
Rad0 Inside radius of rotor lamination. (If MConfig = Ext, it is the
external radius). Note that this is ony used for drawing in the outline
editor; it is not used in the calculation of inertia or RYoke; RadSh is
still used in those calculations in the current version.
Rad1 Rotor surface radius.
Gap Airgap length. Taken with Rad1, this defines the stator bore as 2
(Rad1 + Gap); or 2 (Rad1 Gap) if MConfig ' Ext.
Poles Number of poles.
Slots Number of stator slots. For standard winding types (ConcEqual,
ConcSine or Lap) Slots/Poles must be divisible by the number of phases
(see Connex).
LamShape Lamination shape: Circle, Circ.Chf, Rect, Rect.Rnd., or Annulus; see
Figs. 81 and 82.
Rad3 Stator outer radius.
S-slot Shape of stator slot: Round, Square, PllSlot, PllRound, PllSquare,
PllTooth, HW, Flared or VarDpth. See the reference diagrams.
SlotOrd Order of VarDpth slot-depths: A,B,C,D etc. See Figs. 93 and 94 on page
165. For example, 'A', 'AA', 'AB', 'ABCD'. A must be present.
Lstk Stack length of stator.
Stf Lamination stacking factor. If XStf_R = 1, the same value is used for
the stator and rotor. Typical values are in the range 0.94!0.98.
TGorSO Defines the method of specifying the "tang angle" in Figs.
83,84,86,85,91 and 93. This angle is the angle of the tooth "tang" or
"overhang".
7
TGang The angle is measured relative to a line that is
perpendicular to the tooth centre-line.
SOang The angle is measured relative to a line that is
perpendicular to the slot centre-line.
R_Bars Number of rotor bars or slots. (Also see DblCage).
NumHoles Number of axial through-holes or vents in the rotor. Holes affect the
weight and inertia calculations but are not included in electromagnetic
calculations.
PCDia Pitch circle diameter of ventilation through-holes.
HoleDia Diameter of ventilation through-holes.
DblCage Selects double-cage rotor. The bars of the second cage alternate with
those of the first cage. The parameters for the second cage should be
entered independently of the first cage. Both cages have the same
number of bars, R_Bars, and the total number of bars taking both cages
together is 2 R_Bars.
Bar1 The type of slot in the rotor cage. If DblCage = true, Bar1 is used
only for cage 1.
Bar2 [Only if DblCage = true]. The type of slot in cage 2.
RoShift Rotor shift angle, used for viewing and for defining the rotor position
with respect to the stator in finite-element interfaces.
EditCage [Only if DblCage = true]. Selects Cage1 or Cage2 to be edited.
EditView View: Full motor, Rotor only, Stator only, Stator slot, Rotor slot,
Rotor section, or Axial section. If DblCage = true the parameters
BarExt, ERthk1, ERledge1 etc. apply to Cage1, while for Cage2 the
corresponding parameters have the subscript _2, e.g., BarExt_2,
ERthk1_2, ERledge1_2, ERthk2_2. (See Reference diagrams).
Open stator slots with wedges
SwjType Type of slot-wedge (used only with S-slot = PllSlot).
None No wedge: simple slot; Fig. 87, p. 163.
Type1 Wedge with radiused edges; Fig. 88, p. 163.
Type2 Wedge with chamfered edge at the angle SOAng or
TGANG_S; and fillet radius filSWj; Fig. 89, p. 163.
WSWedge Width of stator slot wedge (PllSlot only, SwjType = Type1 and Type2
only); see Figs. 88 and 89, p. 163.
SSWedge Thickness of stator slot wedge (PllSlot only, SwjType = Type1 and Type2
only); see Figs. 88 and 89, p. 163).
filSWj Fillet radius of stator slot wedge (PllSlot, SwjType = Type 2 only);
PC-IMD 9.04 Input parameters | Outline editor Page 43
The following parameters are among those visible when EditView = Axial section. See
Figs. 74 and 75.
ROH The rotor overhang at each end of the rotor, Fig. 79. Thus the axial
length of the active part of the rotor is Lstk + 2 ROH.
BarExt Bar extension beyond the end of the rotor stack, at each end.
ERType1 End-ring type at left-hand end of rotor. See Fig. 75.
TypeA The end-ring is integral with the bars, as in a die-cast
rotor. If Rim1 = 0, the inside edge of the end-ring is
parallel to the axis. Otherwise if Rim1 <> ERLedge1,
the inside edge of the end-ring is bevelled.
TypeB The end-ring has flat, parallel end-faces and its outer
and inner faces are circular cylinders. It is assumed
to be brazed or welded to the end-rings, which are
rebated to locate it if Rim1 > ERLedge1. Setting Rim1
= 0 has the same effect as setting Rim1 = ERLedge1;
setting Rim1 < ERLedge1 produces an error message.
TypeC The end-ring has flat, parallel end-faces and abuts the
ends of the bars. It is assumed to be brazed or welded
to the ends of the end-rings. If Rim1 = 0, the inside
edge of the end-ring is parallel to the axis. Otherwise
if Rim1 <> ERLedge1, the inside edge of the endring is
bevelled.
Type D The end-ring is similar to Type A except that the inside
and outside diameters are specified (Fig. 75).
ERType2 End-ring type at right-hand end of rotor. Similar to ERType1. See table
above and Fig. 75.
ERthk1 End-ring thickness at left-hand end of rotor.
ERthk2 End-ring thickness at right-hand end of rotor.
ERLedge1 End-ring ledge at left-hand end of rotor.
ERLedge2 End-ring ledge at right-hand end of rotor.
Rim1 End-ring rim at left-hand end of rotor.
Rim2 End-ring rim at right-hand end of rotor. See Fig. 75.
ERIDia1 Inside diameter of left-hand end-ring, Type D.
ERIDia2 Inside diameter of right-hand end-ring, Type D.
ERODia1 Outside diameter of left-hand end-ring, Type D.
ERODia2 Outside diameter of right-hand end-ring, Type D.
NSDuct No. of radial cooling ducts in the stator stack. See Fig. 8. These
will be equally spaced along the stack length, such that the stack is
divided into NSDuct + 1 packets or sections of equal length (Lstk !
NSDuct WSDuct)/(NSDuct + 1) each; the overall length of the stack
(Lstk) does not change when ventilating ducts are introduced. {0}
WSDuct Width of stator cooling duct. See Fig. 79. In the magnetic circuit
analysis, PC-IMD models the effect of ducts by means of a coefficient
similar to Carter's coefficient for slotting, which it uses to modify
the effective airgap length; (see kC_sd). Therefore all the
limitations that apply to the classical Carter's coefficient also apply
in the case of ducts. Very wide ducts would have the same effect as
very wide slot openings, and since Carter's theory was never intended
for extremes of this type, the results will be unpredictable. In such
cases it would be safer to set NSDuct = 0 and enter Lstk = (Actual
Lstk) - NSDuct WSduct manually. When ducts are present, PC-IMD uses
this relationship to deplete the axial iron length of the stator by the
combined axial length ("width") of the ducts.
NRDuct Number of ventilating ducts in the rotor stack. These will be equally
spaced along the stack length, such that the stack is divided into
NRDuct + 1 packets or sections of equal length (Lstk ! NRDuct
WRDuct)/(NRDuct + 1) each; the overall length of the stack (Lstk) does
not change when ventilating ducts are introduced. NRDuct need not be
equal to NSDuct. {0}
WRDuct Width of rotor cooling duct. See Fig. 79 and WSDuct.
PC-IMD 9.04 Input parameters (Template editor) Page 45
3.2 Input parameters : Ted
The template editor Ted is divided into 11 main pages:
Main Contains "top level" parameters that are likely
to be encountered early in a design or analysis,
including the winding connection, supply voltage,
speed or slip, and the numbers of slots and bars.
Winding Winding details including the definition of the
winding layout, and the specification of wire and
insulation. This section complements the Winding
Editor.
Rotor Rotor configuration parameters, including
conductivities of the bars and end-rings, skew,
and other details concerning the rotor slots.
Losses Parameters controlling the loss calculations,
including the presence of rotor or stator cans.
Thermal Data connected with heat transfer and cooling,
covering a range of thermal models.
Hot10/Hot16 (A) Additional data for the Hot10 or Hot16 thermal
models.
Hot10/Hot16 (B)
Test Data Data from no-load and locked-rotor tests that can
be used to derive equivalent-circuit parameters.
Simulation Data for more complex simulations including the
torque/speed characteristic, drive simulation,
and line starting. Cable parameters are included
here.
CoilForm Additional winding parameters for form-wound
coils. This page is hidden if CoilForm = None.
Settings Parameters that select methods for particular
aspects of the calculation. Most adjustment
factors are found here, for the magnetic circuit
and the equivalent circuit and other effects.
Page 46 Input parameters (Template editor) PC-IMD 9.04
3.2.1 TedMain
This page is a summary of some of the most commonly-used parameters.

Configuration and Dimensions
Connex See p. 54.
MConfig See p. 41.
For other (dimensional) parameters in this section, see 3.1.1 and the Reference
diagrams.
Control
Vs The RMS AC line-line voltage at fundamental frequency, used in
Analysis|Steady-state analysis [Ctrl+2] in all cases except when Drive = 6-
Step; see page 48.
TorqCalc Determines the operating points for Analysis|Steady state analysis [Ctrl+2]:
Load Pt. The performance calculation is limited to one operating
point defined by the slip and supply frequency (according
to CalcMode).
LR+Brk+NL The performance calculation includes the locked-rotor and
breakdown points, which may take longer to calculate.
Others Several other combinations of LR (locked-rotor), Brk
(breakdown) and NL (no-load) are provided as options.
DoPart "Do partial load calculations". [Used only for steady-state analysis, and
only if CalcMode = f/PowrSh or f/TorqSh]. When DoPart = true, a new
section appears at the end of the design sheet entitled Rated and
partial load performance. This includes shaft torque and power,
efficiency, power factor, line current and slip, calculated at a series
of fractional loads.
rpmNL The speed (rpm) at which the no-load calculation is performed, when
TorqCalc = NL etc.
CalcMode Selects the combination of parameters that determine the machine
operating point:
f/rpm Actual frequency in Hz and actual speed (usually in
rev/min)
f/slip Actual frequency and slip
rpm/slip Actual speed and slip
rpmS/rpm Synchronous speed and actual speed (usually in rev/min)
rpmS/slip Synchronous speed and slip. Of the parameters Freq,
rpm, rpmS, and slip, any pair not containing Freq and
rpmS together suffices to determine the other two. PC-
IMD supports five of the ten possible pairs.
f/PowerSh
Actual frequency and required shaft power. Steady-state
analysis finds the rotor slip (speed) at which the
required input shaft power PowrSh.. is achieved. In
addition the stall torque, the breakdown torque and the
breakdown slip are computed automatically.
f/TorqSh Actual frequency and required shaft torque. This is
similar to the f/PowrSh option, but uses shaft torque
instead of power.
PowrSh.. The required shaft power. This should be less than 2/3 of the expected
breakdown power; (see TorqSh..).
TorqSh.. The required shaft torque. This should be less than the breakdown
torque. If DoPart = true, PC-IMD computes the operation at 150% load
and in this case TorqSh should be given a value less than 2/3 the
expected breakdown torque.
Slip Rotor slip relative to synchronous speed,, i.e. (rpmS ! rpm)/rpmS.
Freq Fundamental line frequency in Hz.
rpm Actual shaft speed.
rpmS Synchronous speed, i.e. 120 Freq/Poles.
TS_min Minimum value of Slip used in calculating the torque/speed
characteristic. For example, to expand the region of normal motoring
operation, set TS_min = 0 and TS_max = 0.2. {0}
To see the adiabatic temperature rise in the rotor bars and end-rings,
set TS_min ' 1 and TS_max ' 0, so that the speed progresses from 0 to
the synchronous speed and not the other way.
TS_max Maximum value of slip used in calculating the torque/speed
characteristic. {1}
I
dc[mean]
'
3 2
B
I
L1
cos N
1
V
p
' V
dc
R
dc
I
dc[mean]
V
LL1[rms]
'
6
B
V
p
.
Drive Simulation Parameters
Drive The type of drive:
AC_Volts The motor is directly connected to an AC sinewave
voltage source Vs. For three-phase motors this is the
RMS line-line voltage.
6-Step The motor is connected as shown in Fig. 25, and the
inverter is operated in classical six-step mode, [33].
The DC source voltage is Vdc.
PWM The motor is connected as shown in Fig. 25, and the
inverter is operated in PWM mode. The DC source
voltage is Vdc. The chopping (modulation) strategy is
determined by ModStrat.
ACSC An AC series controller is connected between the motor
and the AC sinewave source voltage, Fig. 26.
Direct The operation is simulated at constant speed with a
fixed AC voltage source (Vs volts RMS line-line),
using a matrix formulation and ordinary phase
variables (i.e., not dq-axis variables).
Vdc DC source voltage used in Fig. 25 when Drive = 6-Step or PWM.
Note that when Drive = 6-Step, Analysis|Steady-state analysis [Ctrl+2] uses
a "black box" model of the inverter, in which the source voltage is
Vdc. (In all other cases this calculation uses the AC source voltage
Vs, and does not attempt to model the inverter). In the "black box
inverter model, the DC link current is estimated using the ideal
formula [34]
where I
L1
is the fundamental line current and N
1
is the fundamental
power-factor. Then the voltage at the inverter terminals is given by
and the resulting AC line-line voltage at the motor terminals is
The "black box" model provides a simple approximate method for
estimating the effect of source resistance with a 6-step inverter, even
though the calculations Analysis|Steady-state analysis [Ctrl+2] are performed
entirely with AC phasor quantities at the fundamental frequency.
Rdc DC source resistance in Fig. 25. [ohm] {0}
Fig. 42 PWM : sine/triangle modulation
ModStrat Pulse-width modulation strategy, which controls the chopping of the
inverter transistors.
ST Sine-triangle modulation, [33, 34]. See Fig. 43.
CFrq The carrier frequency ratio used when ModStrat = ST, i.e. the ratio of
the frequency of the triangular carrier wave to the frequency of the
sinusoidal modulating wave in Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is shown for a very low
value (CFrq = 3), for clarity, but higher values (typically 100) are
used in practice. With higher values of CFrq, it may be necessary to
reduce the integration step-length by increasing ISLA. {30}
mIndex The modulation index used when ModStrat = ST, i.e., the ratio of the
amplitude of the modulating wave to the amplitude of the carrier wave,
or V
M
/V
T
in Fig. 43. The linear PWM range is from 0 1. Higher values
of mIndex cause pulse-dropping, eventually resulting in six-step
operation with no control of the current waveform. {0.5}
BreakIT The number of complete electrical cycles that will be simulated before
the simulation is terminated. The waveform plots show the last cycle.
Generally BreakIT should be set to a sufficient number of cycles for
steady-state operation to be attained (e.g. 10). {10}
alphaSCR The phase delay angle of thyristor firing in Fig. 26. alphaSCR = 0
means full conduction, in which the thyristors act like permanently-
closed switches. alphaSCR = 180 means no conduction, in which the
thyristors act like permanently-open switches. [0] {deg}
Transient Simulation Parameters
th1 Point-on-wave angle for soft-starting in line-start calculation,
measured from a positive peak of the line-line voltage v
ab
. [E at Freq]
{0}
th2 Delay angle for soft-starting in line-start calculation [E at Freq].
When a 3-phase motor starts, the poles of the contactor do not all
"make" at the same instant. If the first pole makes before the others,
nothing will happen until the second pole makes and there is a return
circuit to the supply via the line-line supply voltage. The closure of
this first circuit is at the angle
1
(th1). If th1 = 0, this is a
positive peak of the line-line voltage v
ab
. th2 is the point on wave at
which contact is made in the third and final line of the supply,
measured from the instant th1. SCR soft-starters can minimize the DC
offset in the rotor current, and the torque pulsations associated with
them, by setting th1 . 0 and th2 . 90E. [11].
TL0 Load torque coefficient [Nm].
TL1 Load torque coefficient [Nm].
NLT Load torque exponent. In line-starting calculations, the load torque is
computed from
T
Load
= TL0 + TL1 (rpm/rpmS)
NLT

where rpm is the speed and rpmS is the synchronous speed. {1}
JL Load inertia, expressed as a multiple (i.e., per-unit) of the
calculated motor inertia. {0}
JFan Fan inertia, expressed as a multiple (i.e., per-unit) of the
calculated motor inertia. {0}
St. Calc Method of calculating line-start transient.
QStatic The calculation is based on the asynchronous
torque/speed curve with a coarse integration of the
equations of motion with respect to time. At each
speed the torque is computed as though the motor was
operating in the steady-state at that speed. The
advantage of this method is that it uses the saturated
values of magnetizing reactance and leakage reactance,
and includes deep-bar effect. But DC transients at
switch-on are not included, so point-on-wave switching
is not covered by this method.
dqR The instantaneous differential circuit equations are
integrated in a dq reference frame fixed to the rotor.
The parameters (inductances and resistances) are fixed
throughout the calculation, so there is no allowance
for the variation of inductances with saturation or of
rotor resistance with speed. But DC transients at
switch-on are included, and point-on-wave switching
can be used to study the effect of contactor poles
closing at different instants.
dqS As dqR, but the equations are integrated in a dq
reference frame fixed to the stator.
Fig. 43 Wye/delta starting circuit
St.Time Duration of line-starting calculation. The line-starting transient
graphs have a fixed array size of 2048 points. Therefore, if St.Time
= 0.9 s, the default value of the integration time-step is 0.9/2048 =
0.44 ms, or approximately 8E at 50 Hz. See ISLA. [s] {0.9}.
ISLA Integration step-length adjustment factor for line-start transient
calculation. For large motors, or motors with high inertia loads, the
starting time may well exceed the default value of 0.9 s. For example,
if St.Time = 20 s the default value of the integration time-step dt
would be 20/2048 = 9.76 ms . 176E at 50 Hz, which is too long to ensure
stable integration of the differential equations. In such cases dt can
be divided by ISLA, but since the array size for plotting remains fixed
at 2048 points, only every ISLAth point will be plotted. In general
both St.Time and ISLA should be adjusted to achieve a satisfactory
calculation of the line-start transient. St.Time should be adjusted to
be no longer than the actual transient, and ISLA should be adjusted to
give dt of 1E or less. The default values are not automatically correct
for all cases. See page 24. {1}

Wye-delta Starting Parameters
Starter Method of starting when Drive = AC_Volts.
DOL Direct-on-line. The contactor is closed once and
there is no re-connection of the motor windings.
WyeDelta A special contactor is used. The motor is started
with a wye connection. At a certain speed it is
reconnected in delta. Obviously all six phase
terminals must be brought out to the terminal bos.

WyeDelta For wye/delta starting, this is the speed at which the changeover is
made, expressed in percent of synchronous speed. The result is visible
in the torque/speed characteristic. See Fig. 44.
Drive simulation parameters when Drive = Direct
DSimType selects the type of drive simulation when Drive = Direct.
MX only The primitive and reduced matrices are calculated
from the machine parameters (irrespective of the
value of DSimData), but the transient simulation is
not executed.
FullSim runs a full transient simulation for BreakIT cycles.
The supply is a three-phase voltage source Vs, with
the speed set by the frequency and slip. The speed
is constant. The integration step is adjustable
using ISLA (recommended value = 4).
DSimData selects the source of data for the matrix analysis and transient
simulation when Drive = Direct.
Actual The actual machine dimensions, materials, and
winding layout are used.
Test_1 An idealised set of inductances is used. Further
test cases will be added with additional
documentation later, because they are valuable for
teaching as well as for testing purposes.
WriteMX selects the writing of matrix and simulation data when Drive = Direct.
None No data will be written.
Static Only the matrix data will be written, to a file
OPMatrix.txt
Dynamic The matrix data is written to a file OPMatrix.txt.
In addition, a file OLL.txt is written with the
dynamic waveforms of rotor position, three phase
voltages, three line currents, the current in the
first rotor circuit, and the computed electromagnetic
torque at every main integration step. Finally, a file
MLL.txt is written with the inductances LL1[1,1],
LL1[4,4], LL1[1,4] and GNN[1,4] at every main
integration step. LL1 is the reduced inductance
matrix and GNN is the matrix of the rate of change of
inductance with rotor position [H/rad]. Index 1 refers
to phase 1, and index 4 to the first rotor circuit.
RotState permits special test values of the rotor resistance.
Normal Normal resistance
Zero_R Zero resistance; total exclusion of flux transients
Inf_R Infinite resistance; rotor circuits effectively inert

Cable Parameters
N_CBL No. of cables or "connecting wires" : must be 0, 3 or 6. {0}
Lgth_CBL Length of one cable. See page 122. [m]
r_CBL Resistance of one cable at 20EC. [ohm/km]
x_CBL Inductive reactance of one cable at 50 Hz. The actual reactance used
in calculations will be scaled according to the operating frequency
corresponding to synchronous speed. [ohm/km]
c_CBL Cable capacitance, used together with X_CBL to determine the surge
impedance Z0_Cable.
T_CBL Cable temperature. The cable resistance is computed from r_CBL
together with T_CBL, using the temperature coefficient of conductivity
of copper. [EC]
8
For auxiliary winding parameters of split-phase motors see page 59.
9
ConcEqual, ConcSine, ConcUser Lap and FracSlot types are termed "standard" windings because they can
be specified by the standard parameters TC, Throw, CPP etc.: it is not necessary to specify every coil
individually. See Fig. 100.
10
Throw is almost synonymous with Span, except that Span is signed. It also means the same as "coil pitch"
which can be expressed in electrical degrees or radians, or slot-pitches.
3.2.2 TedWinding
Winding parameters
8
Poles No. of poles. See p. 41.
Slots No. of slots. See p. 41.
Connex Selects one of the four connection types:
SplitPh Split phase includes all single-phase motors, including
1-phase motors and motors having capacitors and/or
resistors in series with the auxiliary winding. The
particular type is selected with AuxSpec. See page 3.
2-Phase 2-phase machines considered as balanced polyphase
motors.
3-Ph Wye 3-phase machines with wye connection
3-Ph Delt 3-phase machines with delta connection
WdgType Selects one of the five winding types:
9
ConcEqual Concentric with equal numbers of turns/coil
ConcSine Concentric with sine-distributed turns/coil
Lap Lap winding with equal numbers of turns/coil
FracSlot Fractional-slot winding with equal numbers of
turns/coil
Custom Full custom winding; must be constructed/edited with
the winding editor.
ConcUser Concentric with turns/coil values TC01, TC02, etc. up
to TC06, according to the value of CPP. See Fig. 98 on
page 168.
Note that Offset is required for FracSlot and Custom windings.
Throw The number of slot-pitches separating the "return" coilside from the
"go" coilside. For example, if a coil with Throw = 5 "goes" in slot 7,
it "returns" in slot 7+5 = 12.
10
If WdgType = ConcEqual, ConcSine, or
ConcUser, Throw refers to the outermost coil in the pole-group.
CPP Number of coils per pole. Generally the coils are grouped together in
pole-groups. For example, a 36-slot stator with 2 poles and three
phases could have a single-layer concentric winding with CPP = 3, i.e.
3 coils in each group in each phase, for a total of 3 coils/pole 2
poles 3 phases = 18 coils = 36 coil-sides.
Offset The number of slot-pitches between the starts of Phases 1 and 2 for
polyphase machines; and between the starts of the main and auxiliary
phases for split-phase machines. {Offset = Slots/phase for split-phase
and 2-phase machines, and 2/3 Slots/phase for integral-slot 3-phase
machines; see page 16}.
TC Turns per coil. If TC is changed in a Custom winding, it overwrites
the custom values and assigns the same number of turns to all the coils
(or to the one with largest span, if WdgType = ConSine).
NSH_1 Number of strands in hand in each conductor of specification Wire_1.
(Note: two conductors make one turn). The wire size defined in Wire_1
refers to one strand. See Fig. 95 on p. 166 and Fig. 99 on p. 168.
NSH_2 Number of strands in hand in each conductor of specification Wire_2.
See Figs. 95 on p. 166 and Fig. 99 on page 168.
PPaths Number of parallel paths. All coils of one phase are connected in
series if PPaths = 1. Otherwise the number of coils in series per
phase is equal to the number of coils per phase divided by PPaths. See
Fig. 100.
CnsqPole If true, every other pole-group is omitted in the winding editor,
making a "consequent-pole" winding. {false}
Ext Winding extension at each end of the lamination stack. The wires
leaving the slots run straight (i.e. parallel to the axis) for a short
distance Ext before turning into the end-turns. Ext can be used to
adjust the phase resistance, end-winding leakage reactance, copper
weight, and overall winding length. (See XET and Fig. 76).
XET Adjustment factor for end-turn length. This is useful indeed
essential for adjusting the end-turn contribution to resistance,
inductance and weight. It is essential to have an accurate value for
the mean length of turn (MLT) in order to get the correct stator
resistance and the correct copper weight at the same time. Since end-
winding shapes are not precisely known, adjustment is likely to be
needed. See Fig. 76 on p. 159. See also CoilForm on p. 65. {1}
Liner Thickness of stator slot-liner, used to calculate the cross-sectional
area occupied by the liner in each slot, and hence the depleted slot
area AslotLL. Liner is also used to calculate the thermal resistance
through the slot liner. See ACL, LCL, ThRslot, R_ct, R_cy, and Figs.
95 and 97.
EndFill End-winding volume compaction ratio for calculating LaxPack, i.e., the
"length over ends" of a winding after the end windings have been
compacted. A typical value is 0.5, which means no compaction.
PC Percentage conductivity of stator conductors, relative to that of OFHC
copper at 20EC. This parameter is intended to model the use of stator
windings made of Aluminium or other conductor material. If PC = 0 or
100, the standard conductivity of OFHC copper is used (10
8
/1@724 S at
20EC). {100}
TCC Temperature coefficient of resistivity of stator conductors. If TCC =
0 or 0@393, the standard value for copper is used. [%/EC or %/EF
depending on temperature units] {0}
WireDens Density of stator conductors, used for calculating the conductor
weight. The weight of insulation is not calculated separately, so if
the total weight of conductor + insulation is required, WireDens must
be adjusted in advance. {8890 kg/m
3
}
Conductors in PC-IMD can have two different wire sizes; see Fig. 99 on page 168.
In split-phase motors the main winding conductors can have two different wire sizes,
but the auxiliary winding can have only one wire size.
In a winding with only one wire size, the wire is specified according to the Wire_1
parameter; setting Wire_2 ' None means that there is no second wire. If the second
wire is present, it is specified according to Wire_2.
"Wire" is synonymous with "strand" in PC-IMD.
Wire_1 Selects the method for specifying wire m1, i.e. the size of one strand.
(See NSH_1).
Wire_2 Selects the method for specifying wire m2.
Wire_A Selects the method for specifying the auxiliary wire in split-phase
motors.
WDia_1 Bare wire diameter of one strand of Wire_1. (See NSH_1).
FAWG_1 Fractional American wire gauge of one strand of Wire_1. The help line
shows the wire size (diameter). Use [F2] to display table values.
AWG_1 American wire gauge of one strand of Wire_1.
SWG_1 Standard wire gauge of one strand of Wire_1.
MWG_1 Metric wire gauge of one strand of Wire_1.
SFg_1 Input value of gross slot-fill factor in relation to Wire_1, i.e. the
copper area per slot divided by Aslot. (See Fig. 97).
SFn_1 Input value of net slot fill factor defined by the "heavy build/square-
wire" method. The total wire area per slot is defined as n d
2
where
n is the total number of strands in the slot, and d is the diameter of
each strand including the enamel wire insulation on each strand; (see
InsThk_1). Then SFn_1 = n d
2
/AslotLL. The bare wire diameter WDia_1
is extracted from this data.
wa_1 Width of one strand of rectangular wire of Wire_1.
wb_1 Height of one strand of rectangular wire of Wire_1.
InsThk_1 Insulation thickness on one strand of Wire_1 (per side). For
rectangular wire, InsThk_1 is applied to each of the four sides. For
custom wire, if the insulation thickness retrieved from the custom wire
table is zero, PC-IMD uses the Ted value of InsThk_1. If Wire_1 =
AWGFrac or AWGTable and InsThk_1 = 0, the insulation thickness on each
strand is calculated from an internal formula for "heavy-build"
insulation corresponding to AWG tables.
Second wire
WDia_2 Same as WDia_1, but applied to Wire_2.
FAWG_2 Same as FAWG_1, but applied to Wire_2.
AWG_2 Same as AWG_1, but applied to Wire_2.
SAWG_2 Same as SAWG_1, but applied to Wire_2.
MWG_2 Same as MWG_1, but applied to Wire_2.
SFg_2 Same as SFg_1, but applied to Wire_2.
SFn_2 Same as SFn_1, but applied to Wire_2.
wa_2 Same as wa_1, but applied to Wire_2.
wb_2 Same as wb_1, but applied to Wire_2.
InsThk_2 Same as InsThk_1, but applied to Wire_2.
Auxiliary winding
WDia_A Same as WDia_1, but applied to Wire_A.
FAWG_A Same as FAWG_1, but applied to Wire_A.
AWG_A Same as AWG_1, but applied to Wire_A.
SAWG_A Same as SAWG_1, but applied to Wire_A.
MWG_A Same as MWG_1, but applied to Wire_A.
SFg_A Same as SFg_1, but applied to Wire_A.
SFn_A Same as SFn_1, but applied to Wire_A.
wa_A Same as wa_1, but applied to Wire_A.
wb_A Same as wb_1, but applied to Wire_A.
InsThk_A Same as InsThk_1, but applied to Wire_A.

Slot wedges
TopStick If true, the "topstick" area is subtracted from Aslot in calculating
AslotLL. See Fig. 97.
TwjLeg Leg length of "top wedge". Together with the liner area, the top wedge
area is subtracted from Aslot in the calculation of AslotLL. The top
wedge is assumed to be present in every stator slot. If there is no
top wedge, set TwjThk = 0. See Fig. 96.
TwjWid Width of top wedge.
TwjThk Thickness of top wedge.
PhsLeg Leg length of "phase separator". Unlike the top wedge area, the phase
separator area is not subtracted from Aslot in the calculation of
AslotLL; however, in the Winding Editor the individual SFn values for
each slot are computed after subtracting the phase separator area. The
phase separator is assumed to be present only between coilsides of
different phases, and this is determined by PC-IMD. If there is no
phase separator, set PhsThk = 0. See Fig. 96.
PhsWid Width of phase separator.
PhsThk Thickness of phase separator.
Magnetic wedges
SWedge Determines the nature of a magnetic wedge in the top of the stator
slot, if any. The wedge occupies the slot-opening to a depth of TGD_S
(or h1 in the case of slot type HW); see the Reference Figures. In PC-
IMD the only effect of a magnetic wedge is on the stator slot-leakage
permeance PCslot and thence on the stator leakage reactance X1; but a
wider range of effects can be calculated with PC-FEA through the
finite-element GoFER.
NonMag No wedge.
LinMu The wedge has a constant relative permeability of
muWedge.
Steel The wedge is continuous with the stator steel; in
other words, the slot is closed. For calculations in
PC-IMD, the relative permeability must still be
specified as muWedge, but in any finite-element
calculations the nonlinear BH characteristic of the
steel will be used.
muWedge The relative permeability of the stator magnetic wedge, if SWedge =
LinMu. In PC-IMD, this permeability is used in internal analytical
calculations; but PC-FEA uses the BH characteristic of the stator
steel. {1}
Auxiliary winding parameters (split-phase motors only)
PC-IMD includes all variants of split-phase motor with capacitors and/or resistors
in series with the auxiliary winding. For split-phase motors set Connex = SplitPh.
AuxSpec Selects the way in which the auxiliary winding is specified:
SinglePh No auxiliary winding.
T.Ratio The auxiliary winding is assumed to have the same
distribution as the main winding, but a different
number of turns and a different conductor size. This
requires only two parameters: T_ratio for the turns
ratio and A_ratio for the conductor area ratio.
FullSpec The auxiliary winding is fully specified in the same
way as the main winding, using the parameters AWdgType,
AuxThrow, AuxCPP, AuxTC, AuxNSH, AuxPaths, Aux_Ext,
AuxWSpec, and AuxWire.
The auxiliary winding axis is assumed to be 90Eelec ahead of the main
winding axis, so that a magnetic field rotating in the forward (CCW)
direction will generate an EMF in the auxiliary winding that leads the
EMF generated in the main winding.
T_ratio [Only if AuxSpec = T.Ratio]. Turns ratio (aux/main). Together with
A_ratio, it provides a quick and convenient means for specifying the
auxiliary winding without having to specify any detail about its
layout, wire size etc. When AuxSpec = T_Ratio, the main and auxiliary
windings are assumed to have the same winding factor kw1, so that ATR
= ETR: i.e., the actual and effective turns ratios are equal.
A_ratio If AuxSpec = T.Ratio, the auxiliary wire size is specified simply by
the value of A_ratio, which is the ratio of conductor areas (aux/main).
It is assumed that AuxPaths = PPaths, NSH_A = NSH_1, and Aux_Ext = 0.
The aux wire diameter is calculated as
WDia_Aux := WDia Sqrt(A_ratio)
The ratio of auxiliary copper weight to main copper weight is then
WtCuAux/WtCuMain = T_ratio A_ratio MLT_Aux/MLT.
The mean turn length of the auxiliary winding can be different from the
MLT of the main winding because PC-IMD allows for the width of the
conductors when calculating the end-turn lengths, and also because the
auxiliary winding can be specified to be in the tops of the slots with
the main winding in the bottoms of the slots; see AuxSP.
AuxXET Adjustment factor for end-turn length in the auxiliary winding.
AuxExt Equivalent to Ext, for auxiliary winding. See Fig. 76 on p. 159.
XX1aux Adjustment factor for auxiliary winding leakage reactance.
XR1Aux Adjustment factor for auxiliary winding resistance.
AuxWType Equivalent to WdgType for main winding.
AuxThrow Equivalent to Throw for main winding.
AuxCPP Equivalent to CPP for main winding.
AuxTC Equivalent to TC for mainwinding.
NSH_A Equivalent to NSH for main winding.
AuxPaths Equivalent to PPaths for main winding.
X
1 aux
' x
aux
a
2
X
1
x
aux
'
uX
1slot
X
1diff
X
1end
X
1skew
X
1
XXL1.
Wire_A Wire specification method for the auxiliary winding; equivalent to
Wire_1 for the main winding. All the options available with Wire_1 are
available.
Wire size parameters for Wire_A are listed on page 57.
PC_WA Percentage conductivity of auxiliary winding conductors, relative to
that of OFHC copper at 20EC. This parameter is intended to model the
use of stator windings made of Aluminium or other conductor material.
If PC_WA = 0 or 100, the standard conductivity of OFHC copper is used
(10
8
/1@724 S/m at 20EC). {100}
TCC_WA Temperature coefficient of resistivity of auxiliary winding conductors.
If TCC_WA = 0 or 0@393, the standard value for copper is used. [%/EC or
%/EF depending on temperature units]. {0}
Dens_WA Density of auxiliary wire, used for calculating the conductor weight.
The weight of insulation is not calculated separately, so if the total
weight of conductor + insulation is required, Dens_WA must be adjusted
in advance. {8890 kg/m
3
}
AuxSP Position of auxiliary winding in the slot. The leakage reactance of
the auxiliary winding X
1 aux
is determined by an equation of the form
which scales the value from the main winding leakage reactance X
1
by the
product of the square of the turns ratio a and an additional factor
x
aux
, which in turn is given by
The slot-leakage component is varied according to the position of the
auxiliary winding in the slot, according to the parameter AuxSP which
defines the value of the coefficient u :
AuxSP u Interpretation
random 1@0 With a random distribution of conductors in
the slot, the slot permeance coefficient is
h/3w, where h is the slot depth and w is the
slot-width.
top 0@5 The auxiliary winding conductors are
distributed through the top half of the slot.
bottom 2@0 The auxiliary winding conductors are
distributed through the bottom half of the
slot.
User uAuxSP u ' uAuxSP
The standard coefficients 1@0, 0@5 and 2@0 are based on the relative
slot-permeance coefficients defined in Ref. [2], p. 5-56. These are
rigorous for parallel-sided slots, but they do not include the
additional permeance associated with the tooth overhangs (basically
TGD/SO). Therefore the variation in u (0@5 2@0) probably accentuates
the effect of the slot position. For this reason the User option is
provided, so that the effect can be weakened according to the user's
judgement.
R ' Rad1 Gap TGD y (SD TGD)
For example, if the TGD/SO contribution is equal to the contribution
from the main part of the slot, it can be argued that "top" should have
a value equal to uAuxSP ' (0@5+1)/2 ' 0@75, while "bottom" should have
a value uAuxSP ' (2@01)/2 ' 1@5. This kind of approximation will soon
be replaced by a more rigorous automatic algorithm.
AuxSP also determines the radius R of a cylindrical surface on which
the end-turns of the auxiliary winding are assumed to lie: this radius
is given by
The value of the coefficient y is determined by AuxSP :
AuxSP y Interpretation
random 39508
top 39507
bottom 39603
User yAuxSP y ' yAuxSP
The value of y allows for the change in the end-turn length due to the
position of the auxiliary winding in the slot. When AuxSP ' User,
yAuxSP should not be given extreme values to achieve a good match with
the measured resistance; it is better to adjust AuxXET which is
intended for that purpose.
Bifilar Method of specifying bifilar turns. This is available for both the
main and the auxiliary winding, but is normally used only in the
auxiliary winding as a means of increasing the resistance to improve
the starting performance.
None Bifilar winding is not used
AllCoils All coils in the winding are bifilar wound. The number
of bifilar turns is specified indirectly through
BifAux (for the auxiliary winding) or BifMain )for the
main winding).
PerCoil Individual coils can be bifilar wound with "back
turns". An additional column appears in the coil
table, labelled Bif.
The meaning of the "back turns" and the bifilar percentage is described
in SEM-3. Note that bifilar winding changes the resistance and the
mean length of turn, but it does not change the number of turns in
series per phase.
BifAux "Percentage bifilar" of auxiliary winding when Bifilar = AllCoils. See
SEM-3. [%] {0}
BifMain "Percentage bifilar" of main winding when Bifilar = AllCoils. See SEM-
3. [%] {0}.

Split-phase or single-phase calculation
Calc1ph Method of calculating split-phase motor performance.
(See Fig. 51 on p. 102)
FBfield Forward and backward rotating-field method
SymmCpt Symmetrical component method
X-field Cross-field method

C_start Start capacitance [microFarad].
C_run Run capacitance [microFarad].
R_start Start resistance [ohm].
R_run Run resistance [ohm].
CutOut On the torque/speed curve, CutOut causes the "start" impedance
(R_start/C_start) to switch to the "run" impedance (R_run/C_run) when
Speed speed = COSpeed (formerly called CutoutSpeed).
Delay a Delay [s] has elapsed. For normal starting, set TSMin = 1 and
TSMax = 0 so that the torque/speed curve will be calculated
from standstill up to synchronous speed.
IsUp IL1 > IsUp (increasing line current)
IsDn IL1 < IsDn (decreasing line current)
ImainUp Im > ImainUp (increasing main winding current)
ImainDn Im < ImainDn (decreasing main winding current)
IauxUp Ia > IauxUp (increasing auxiliary winding current)
IauxDn Ia < IauxDn (decreasing auxiliary winding current)
VauxUp Vaux > VauxUp (increasing auxiliary winding voltage)
VauxDn Vaux < VauxDn (decreasing auxiliary winding voltage)
VcUp VZc > VcUp (increasing capacitor voltage)
VcDn VZc < VcDn (decreasing capacitor voltage)
TapType Selects the connection for tapped-winding capacitor motors, Fig. 105.
(See Fig. 51 on p. 102).
None No tap
Base The "base" tapped-winding circuit connection
G-tap The Grundfos tap connection
T-conn T-connection; see Fig. 106 on p. 172, and [1]. Set Tap =
50, CZaux = Aux, and tMain = tAux = 0. The turns ratio
(Aux/Main) should be approximately 0@866. An example of
the phasor diagram is shown in Fig. 107 on p. 173.
Others Other configurations of tapped-winding motor can be
calculated with Calc1ph = X-field only; see Fig. 105(a).
Tap Percentage (%) of turns in the tapped part of the tapped winding.
CZaux Determines the connection of the auxiliary impedance in the tapped-
winding connection in Fig. 105(a), and the sign of the per-unit speed.
CZaux Location of aux impedance Sign of per-unit speed
Aux Aux Positive
Main Main Positive
AuxRev Aux Negative
MainRev Main Negative
tMain The percentage reduction in main winding turns effected by the x-tap in
Fig. 105(a), such that x = tMain/100. [%] {0}
tAux The percentage reduction in auxiliary winding turns effected by the y-
tap in Fig. 105(a), such that y = tAux/100. [%] {0}
3.2.3 TedCoilForm
CoilForm Selects the winding coil-form (sometimes called "arbor"). This is
particularly intended to provide a means of predicting the mean turn
length MLT accurately.
None No coil form is used. The mean length of turn MLT and
other winding dimensions are deduced from the physical
geometry of the motor; see Fig. 76 on page 159.
Concentric The dimensions A,B,L,S are used, as defined in Fig.
45, in the table on page 65, and in the equations on
page 65. When WdgType = ConcUser, up to 6 coils can
be defined independently, depending on CPP. See
Fig. 98 on page 168.
Lap The dimensions X,Y,R,L,S are used, as defined in
Fig. 45, in the table on page 65, and in the
equations on page 65.
Wave
For wound-rotor motors (MConfig ' WR), the rotor winding is assumed to
be a modified wave winding: see Fig. 104 on page 171. The mean length
of turn MLT is calculated as for the WAVE coil form in Fig. 45, with
X ' CWR/2
Y ' COHR.
When MConfig = WR, Wire_R must be BareDia or Rect.
Fig. 44 Coil form dimensions
Definitions
Label in Fig. 45 Name in PC-IMD Definition
Concentric winding arbor (1 6 coils, all in series)
A cf_A1
[,cf_A2,...,cf_A6]
End-winding length of innermost turn of
each coil at top end of arbor (dot-to-
dot)
B cf_B1
[,cf_B2,...,cf_B6]
End-winding length of innermost turn of
each coil at bottom end of arbor
Lap and wave winding arbor (16 coils, all in series)
X cf_X Half-width between peg centers, Fig. 45
Y cf_Y "Height" of end-winding at both ends of
arbor, taken as the vertical dimension
between peg centers, Fig. 45.
R cf_R Bend radius around peg
All types
L Lstk + 2 Ext Length of the straight segment of each
coilside on the arbor. Lstk = Actual
stack length of motor stator; Ext =
extension of straight length of coilside
at each end of the stack
S cf_S Sleeve dimension
Note : the prefix "cf_" means "coil form".
Calculation of mean turn length MLT
Concentric
For each coil we calculate the perimeter of the central filament
PCF ' 2L A + B 2B c/2
where the "build-up" c is calculated by assuming that the coilside on the coil
form has a square cross-section of area ACF ' c
2
; see Fig. 45. ACF is calculated
from the combined copper cross-section of all the strands in the coilside, taking
into account the appropriate number of turns in each coil, and dividing by a
"packing factor" which is assumed to be 0@5.
Then the mean length of turn is given by
MLT ' (PCF
1
TC01 PCF
2
TC02 + ...+ 2 * S)/(TC01 TC02 ...)
Lap / Wave
For each coil we calculate the perimeter of the central filament
PCF ' 2L 4 /(X
2
Y
2
) 2B (R + c/2).
The "build-up" c is calculated as for the Concentric coil form, and so is the MLT.
Then the mean length of turn is given by
MLT ' (PCF TC_R 2 S) /TC_R.
3.2.4 TedRotor
Rotor Parameters
R_Bars Number of rotor bars or slots (see DblCage). (See p. 41).
muPlug Relative permeability of a plug or slot-wedge in the rotor "setback"
area, Fig. 73.
muPlug Meaning
0 The rotor slot is treated as a closed slot bridged by
the plug; Erb is calculated using SetBack instead of
R_Bridge.
1 The plug is absent.
any other
value
The plug is treated as having a relative permeability
of muPlug.
SBFull Specifies if the conductor fills the SetBack area or slot opening area.
See Fig. 73. [SBFull has no meaning for closed rotor slots].
true This is usually the case for aluminium die-cast cages.
false If copper bars are used SBFull would normally be false,
unless the bar cross-section has a tab that protrudes
into the slot opening area.
DblCage Selects double-cage rotor. See p. 41 and Fig. 103.
Lstk Stack length of rotor if ROH = 0. See p. 41 and Fig. 79.
ROH The rotor overhang at each end of the rotor. See p. 43 and Fig. 79.
XStf_R Adjustment factor for the rotor lamination stacking factor. The rotor
lamination stacking factor is equal to Stf XStf_R. {1}
Skew Skew of rotor bars, measured in units determined by SkewSpec. Skew is
used (mostly in small motors) to reduce cogging and harmonic torque
components. It tends to reduce the coupling between the stator and
rotor windings, which is tantamount to an increase in the leakage
reactances. The maximum permitted Skew is 1 pole-pitch or 180E elec.

SkewUnits Units in which Skew is specified.
S-Slots No. of stator slot-pitches
R-Bars No. of rotor slot-pitches
puPole per-unit of 1 pole-pitch
mdeg Mechanical degrees
edeg Electrical degrees
Ecc Eccentricity. PC-IMD estimates the lateral static magnetic force UMP
("unbalanced magnetic pull") when the rotor is offset from the centre-
line of the stator. [N]
Cage 1
PC1 Percentage (%) conductivity of rotor bars at 20EC, relative to that of
copper at 20EC, 10
8
/1@724 S/m, equivalent to a resistivity of 10@37
ohm/circular mil-ft. If Bar1 = Type4, Type7, Type8, Type10 or TypeOC
(see reference diagrams), PC1 refers to the upper section of the bar,
while PC2 and PCN are used for the lower bar and the neck,
respectively. A typical PC1 value for aluminium bars is 50-55%. This
may be reduced by 2-5% to allow for shrinkage of the cast bars (but see
Shrink). Split-phase motors sometimes use high-resistivity materials
with PC1 as low as 15%. If DblCage = true, separate parameters PC1_2,
PC2_2 and PCN_2 are used for the second cage. {50%}
TCC1 Temperature coefficient of rotor bar resistivity. As with PC1, if Bar1
= Type4, Type7, Type8, Type10 or TypeOC, TCC1 refers to the upper
section of the bar, while TCC2 and TCCN are used for the lower bar and
the neck, respectively. If DblCage = true, parameters TCC1_2, TCC2_2
and TCCN_2 apply to the second cage. [%/EC or %/EF] {0@375%/EC}
PCEndR Percentage conductivity of end-rings at 20EC, relative to that of copper
at 20EC. If DblCage = true, separate parameters PCEndR_2 and TCCEndR2
are used for the second cage. {50%}
TCCEndR Temperature coefficient of end-ring resistivity. {0@375%/EC}
The next four parameters are used with "vertical" double-cage rotors of the type
where each bar is divided radially into three sections: (i.e., Bar1 = Type4, Type7,
Type8, Type10 or O-Custom); see Fig. 102.
PC2 The percentage conductivity of the lower bar.
TCC2 The temperature coefficient of resistivity of the lower bar. [%/EC or
%/EF depending on temperature units].
PCN The percentage conductivity of the neck.
TCCN The temperature coefficient of resistivity of the neck. [%/EC or %/EF
depending on temperature units]
CgDens Density of rotor cage bars, used in the calculation of the rotor cage
weight, the moment of inertia, and the thermal mass of the rotor cage.
{2700 (Aluminium)} [kg/m
3
]
ERDens Density of rotor end-rings. {2700 (Aluminium)} [kg/m
3
]
Note that the densities of the stator and rotor lamination materials are taken from
the steel databases.
Shrink The shrinkage of the rotor bar, such that Abar = (1 ! Shrink) the
winding area of the slot. The winding area is the complete slot if
SBfull = true; see reference figures. This is slightly smaller than the
gross punched area ARslot because the top of the bar is assumed to be
flat (i.e., it does not include the small segment that would be added
if the rotor bar extended to the curved surface at Rad1). Shrink can
be used to adjust the bar cross-section and the bar resistance Rbar,
and hence the rotor resistance R2. It has no effect on the deep-bar
calculation. Note that Shrink has no effect on the end-rings, whose
specified dimensions are taken as the finished dimensions.
Cage 2
If DblCage = True, a section called "Cage 2" is available for the parameters of the
second cage. Non-dimensional parameters of the second cage are similar to those of
the first cage, with subscript _2. For dimensional parameters refer to 3.1 and/or
the reference diagrams.
Rotor Fins
NRFins1 No. of rotor fins on left-hand end-ring.
NRFins2 No. of rotor fins on right-hand end-ring.
RFinThk1 Thickness of rotor fin on left-hand end-ring.
RFinThk2 Thickness of rotor fin on left-hand end-ring.
RFinL1 Axial length of fin at left-hand end of rotor.
RFinL2 Axial length of fin at right-hand end of rotor.
Rotor Winding
RWdgType Rotor winding type.
ModWave Only the retrogressive modified wave winding type is
available. See Fig. 104 on page 171. The winding
dimensions are given in Fig. 45 on page 64.
RConnex Connection of rotor winding.
Wye Wye connection (3 collector rings)
Dlt Delta connection (3 collector rings)
Open Three separate phases, requiring 6 collector rings.
PPaths_R No. of parallel paths in each phase of the rotor winding; normally 1 or
2. See page 171. {2}
Throw_R Throw or span of rotor coils. See page 171.
TC_R No. of turns per coil in rotor winding.
NSH_R No. of strands-in-hand in one rotor conductor.
Wire_R Method of specifying the rotor conductor, equivalent to Wire_1 for the
main winding. Wire_B must be BareDia or Rect.
wa_R When Wire_R = Rect, wa_R is the width of a rectangular strand.
wb_R When Wire_R = Rect, wb_R is the thickness of a rectangular strand.
WDia_R Diameter of one strand of wire in rotor conductor.
CWR Physical coil width: see Fig. 45 on p. 64. [mm]
COHR Coil overhang at each end of the rotor: see Fig. 45 on p. 64. [mm]
BarExt "Bar extension" beyond the end of the rotor stack, at each end. See
Fig. 75 on p. 158. {0} [mm]
XET_R Adjustment factor for end-turn length in rotor winding. This is needed
to account for the "knuckle" at the coil-head, which is not represented
in the planar drawing in Fig. 45 on p. 64. {1}
Liner_R Thickness of rotor slot-liner. [mm]
PC1 Conductivity of rotor conductors. See page 67.
TCC1 Temperature coefficient of resistivity of rotor conductors. [%/EC or
%/EF depending on temperature units].
Fig. 45 Wound-rotor induction machine with frequency converter
Rotor External Circuit
Fig. 46 shows the general configuration of a wound-rotor machine with a
bidirectional frequency converter in the rotor circuit. The voltage V
2
applied at
the slip-rings is defined by Vrd and Vrq. V
2
, Vrd and Vrq are all per-phase values.
PC-IMD treats the frequency converter as a lossless power converter. It does not
model any absorption or generation of reactive power by the frequency converter.
The complex power at the slip-rings is PXR + jQXR; see p. 134.
RXConnex For wound-rotor machines with a passive impedance (R_RX, L_RX)
connected at the slip-rings, RXConnex defines the connection; Fig. 80.
Wye Wye connection (3 collector rings)
Dlt Delta connection (3 collector rings)
Open Three separate phases, requiring 6 collector rings.
R_RX Resistance of one phase of external impedance. [ohm]
L_RX Inductance of one phase of external impedance. [ohm]
Vrd Real component of phase voltage at the slip-rings. "Real" means in
phase with the stator phase voltage whose RMS line-line value is Vs.
Note that the voltage Vrd + jVrq is expressed in actual volts at the
slip-ring.
Vrq Imaginary component of phase voltage at the slip-rings. A positive
value leads the stator phase voltage by 90E. [V]
V_CR AC voltage drop across one contact between one brush and one slip-ring.
[V] {0}
R_CR Resistance of one contact between one brush and one slip-ring. [ohm]
{0}
Note : it is recommended to use the phasor diagram to observe the effect of Vrd,
Vrq, R_RX and L_RX. See also SEM-3.
3.2.5 TedLosses
Windage and Friction Loss Parameters
Wf0 Power loss due to windage and friction, specified at the reference
speed RPM0.
RPM0 Rotor speed at which friction and windage power Wf0 is specified.
NWFT Exponent for variation of windage and friction torque with speed. The
windage and friction power loss is Wf0 (rpm/RPM0)
NWFT+1
[W]. {1}
W_brg Bearing loss (fixed). {0} [W]
Stray Load Loss Parameters
SLLCalc Selects the method for calculating stray-load loss:
ANSI C.50 If the shaft power is less than 2,000 kW, the stray load
loss is taken as a 1.2% reduction of the shaft power.
Otherwise the reduction is taken as 0.9%. In generating
mode, the reductions become additions. This method is
applicable only to 3-phase machines.
SL User User-specified resistance. The stray load loss is
represented by the additional resistance rSLL [ohm] in
series with the stator phase resistance R1, giving stray
load losses proportional to primary current squared.
Detailed PC-IMD calculates the stray load loss from components
due to MMF and slotting harmonics.
No SLL The stray load losses are set to zero.
SL%PSh This method is similar to the ANSIC.50 method with the
only difference that it allows the user to specify the
stray load losses as a given fraction SL%PSh of the
shaft power.
SEM Detailed method described in SEM-3.
PC-IMD also calculates harmonic losses in the rotor bars if EQcct =
Alger. These losses are sometimes included in the stray load loss, but
in PC-IMD they are classified separately as harmonic losses and
totalled as WHx.
rSLL The primary series resistance used to model stray load losses. rSLL is
taken as a percentage (%) of the stator resistance R1.
SL%PSh Stray load losses expressed as a percentage (%) of shaft power. Typical
values are in the range 0.5-0.8 %.
DistPSLL Distribution of stray load loss. If DistPSLL = 1, the stray load loss
is subtracted from the shaft power. If DistPLL = 0, it is added to the
electrical power. Any value between 0 and 1 is permitted. {0.5}
XWrth Adjustment factor for stray-load loss component Wrth. {1}
XWsth Adjustment factor for stray-load loss component Wsth. {1}
XWrtso Adjustment factor for stray-load loss component Wrtso. {1}
11
For the Steinmetz equation and iron-loss coefficients, see the WinSPEED manual.
Core Loss Parameters
WFeCalc Selects the method used for iron loss calculation:
Classical The iron loss is obtained by scaling from the input
value of spWFe, with two components, Wst for the
stator teeth and Wsy for the stator yoke:
Wst = WstWkg (WtFest + WtTri)
Wsy = WsyWkg WtFesy
where WstWkg = spWFe (Bstpk/1.5)
2
XWFeT
and WsyWkg = spWFe (Bsypk/1.5)
2
XWFeY.
SPEED As Classical, but instead of using spWFe, WstWkg and
WsyWkg are calculated using a modified Steinmetz
equation that gives the hysteresis and eddy-current
components separately, using the database values of
the iron-loss coefficients for the currently selected
steel.
11
If MagCalc = Classical, the flux-densities are
assumed to be sinusoidal in time with peak values
Bstpk, Bsypk and frequency Freq in the stator, and
Brtpk and Brypk and frequency (slip Freq) in the
rotor. Consequently the Steinmetz equation is used in
its simple "sinusoidal" form.
If MagCalc = SPEED, the flux-density waveforms are
differentiated to obtain mean-squared values of
|dB/dt|, and the specific eddy-current and hysteresis
losses are computed using the "dB/dt" version of the
Steinmetz equation.
User The total iron loss is specified as WIron, which is
fixed. No breakdown of components is attempted.
WIron is assumed to arise in the stator (WFeS) and the
rotor iron loss (WFeR) is taken as zero.
WIron User-specified value of iron loss, [W] See WFeCalc.
spWFe Specific iron loss at a peak flux-density of 1.5T and frequency Freq.
[normally W/kg; but by default, the units are the default units of
Losses divided by the default units of Weight]. (Used only when WFeCalc
= Classical).
XWFeT Adjustment factor for iron loss in the stator teeth. {1.0}
XWFeY Adjustment factor for iron loss in the stator yoke. {1.0}
XFe Global adjustment factor applied to the total core losses after all the
constituent parts have been added together. Although XFe is not
directly applied to the individual components of iron loss, a change in
its value will generally produce minor changes in them, because it will
change the core-loss component of current and perturb the other
currents (and flux-linkages) in the equivalent-circuit. XFe can be
used to account for such effects as flux rotation that are not already
incorporated in the core-loss coefficients derived from manufacturers'
steel data or stationary-field core-loss measurements.
Can Loss Parameters
CanStyle Selects the type of the retaining can, if any:
None No can.
Stator The can is fixed to the stator bore.
Rotor The can is fixed to the surface of the rotor.
Both Both rotor and stator cans are present.
Can losses are computed using Russell and Norsworthys method [15],
which assumes resistance-limited eddy-currents. The rotor can losses
are induced by modulation of the airgap flux due to slotting, but the
stator can is exposed to the full rotating flux and all its harmonics,
and is liable to have high eddy-current losses unless it is thin and/or
has high resistivity. If both cans are present, PC-IMD computes the
losses in each can independently of the other one
SCanThk Radial thickness of stator can.
SCanSec Number of sections or rings into which the stator can is divided. If
SCanSec = 1, the can is a continuous cylinder. Sectioning increases
the effective resistance of the eddy-current paths. {1}
Spc_Can Percentage conductivity of the can relative to that of copper at 20EC.
{2.5%}. The stator can losses are evaluated at temperature T_s. If
TempCalc <> Hot10,
SCanTF Temperature coefficient of resistivity of stator can. [p.u./EC] {0}
SCanOH1,2 Overhang of stator can at the two ends of the stator lamination stack.
{0}
RCanThk Radial thickness of rotor can.
RCanSec Number of sections into which the rotor can is divided.
Rpc_Can Percentage conductivity of the can relative to that of copper at 20EC.
{2.5%}. The rotor can losses are evaluated at temperature T_r. If
TempCalc <> Hot10, T_r = T_rtr.
RCanTF Temperature coefficient of resistivity of rotor can. [p.u./EC] {0}
RCanOH1,2 Overhang of rotor can at the two ends of the rotor lamination stack.
{0}
3.2.6 TedThermal

Basic Thermal Parameters
TempCalc Selects the method for calculation of temperature rise:
Fixed All temperatures are fixed. The temperature rise TempRise
is fixed as T_wdg ! Ambient. Machine parameters are
computed using T_wdg and T_rtr.
DegCW
(Fig.
108)
PC-IMD multiplies the total computed losses by DegCW to
get the 'temperature rise' (TempRise) which is assigned
to T_wdg ! Ambient. DegCW must be supplied.
HTCoeff
(Fig.
109)
Two thermal resistances ThR_ws (winding to frame surface)
and ThR_fs (frame surface to ambient) are used to model
the thermal behaviour. ThR_ws must be supplied, but
ThR_fs is calculated from HTC. (q.v.)
Hot10
(Fig.
110)
10-node thermal model. The temperature rise is
calculated at several points in the machine using a
thermal equivalent-circuit. Most of the thermal
resistances and capacitances are computed from dimensions
and material property data on Ted/3-4.
Hot16
(Fig.
111)
16-node thermal model. Similar to Hot10, but with three
additional nodes at each end to accommodate axial
variation of temperature and direct forced air cooling.
The additional nodes are on the frame, the stator end-
windings, and the rotor end-rings.
Except when TempCalc = Fixed, the performance calculation is iterated
until the winding resistance and losses are consistent with the
temperature rise. The convergence is tested using ThTol.
Apart from TempCalc = Fixed, the simplest thermal calculation is
TempCalc = DegCW. When TempCalc = DegCW, virtually all thermal
parameters except DegCW can be neglected.
However, if the weights, inertia, thermal capacitance and thermal time-
constant are to be calculated correctly, several other dimensions and
specific heats must must also be specified : see p. 77.
Ambient Ambient temperature.
Required parameters when TempCalc is not Fixed.
ThTol The convergence tolerance used in iterative thermal calculations.
Except when TempCalc = Fixed, Analysis | Steady-state analysis is recursed
until the change in winding temperature between two successive
recursions is less than ThTol. If ThTol = 0, the tolerance is made
equal to 0.02 T_wdg. If ThTol is small, the solution time will
increase, especially if CalcMode = f/PowerSh or f/TorqSh, and/or if
TorqCalc is set to any value other than LoadPt. {0}
Required parameters when TempCalc = DegCW or HTCoeff
T_wdg Stator winding temperature. If TempCalc = Fixed, the winding resistance
is computed at T_wdg. If TempCalc = DegCW or HTCoeff, T_wdg is the
initial value for iterative thermal computations. If TempCalc = Hot10
or Hot16 the initial temperature of the winding is defined by IT_C at
node C and IT_E at node E, and in these cases T_wdg is not used. See
also T_c. {25EC}
T_rtr Temperature of the rotor cage. If TempCalc = Fixed, the rotor
resistance is calculated at T_rtr. If TempCalc = DegCW or HTCoeff,
there is assumed to be a fixed temperature difference between the rotor
and the stator winding, defined by T_wdg ! T_rtr. If TempCalc = Hot10
or Hot16, the initial temperature of the rotor is defined by IT_r, and
in this case T_rtr is not used. In all cases the output final
temperature is T_r, the temperature at node R. {25EC}
T_aux If Connex = SplitPh, AuxSpec = FullSpec, and TempCalc = Fixed, the
auxiliary winding temperature is T_aux, not T_wdg. This is the only
option for calculating with different temperatures in the main and
auxiliary windings. In all other cases the auxiliary winding
temperature is equal to the main winding temperature. If Connex <>
SplitPh, T_aux is not required. {25EC}
DegCW The thermal resistance between the winding and the ambient, used only
when TempCalc = DegCW. This is the simplest possible "thermal model"
for characterizing the heat dissipation capability of the motor. See
Fig. 108 on p. 174. For example, suppose a motor has a total loss
WTotal = 466 W, and DegCW = 0@3. The temperature rise is calculated as
TempRise = WTotal DegCW = 466 0@3 = 140 EC
This would normally be interpreted as the winding temperature rise
above ambient. Thus if Ambient = 25EC, the winding temperature or
conductor temperature T_c will appear as
T_c = Ambient + TempRise = 140 + 25 = 165 EC.
When TempCalc = DegCW, the rotor temperature T_r tracks the winding
temperature in such a way that the temperature difference T_r T_c is
maintained equal to T_rtr T_wdg. This is hardly a calculation, but
more of an aide-memoire to lodge a notional piece of information (if
one knows it): for example, if one knows that the rotor temperature is
generally 20EC higher than the winding temperature, one would set T_rtr
= T_wdg + 20, and the DegCW model would maintain this difference.
DegCW is often combined with the overall thermal capacitance to give
the thermal time-constant, which is useful in estimating the effect of
intermittent operation, (SEM, Ch.1). {3@0} [EC/W]
Required parameters when TempCalc = HTCoeff
ThR_ws The thermal resistance between the winding and the frame surface, used
only when TempCalc = HTCoeff. The HTCoeff model is shown in Fig. 108
on p. 174. It is slightly more complex than the DegCW model:
(a) The heat transfer from frame-to-ambient is characterized by a
heat-transfer coefficient HTC, which is used together with the
frame surface area FSArea to calculate a frame-to-ambient thermal
resistance
R_fa ' 1/(h FSArea)
where h is the heat-transfer coefficient
h ' HTC [1 HTTC (T_f Ambient)].
(b) The frame surface temperature T_f is calculated using
T_f ' Ambient WTotal R_fa
where WTotal is the total loss in the machine.
(c) The stator yoke temperature T_y is calculated as
T_y ' T_f WTotal ThR_ws.
(d) The stator winding temperature T_c is calculated as
T_c ' T_y WCuS ThRSlot,
where ThRSlot is the thermal resistance across the combined slot-
liners. (See Liner and ct_Liner).
(e) The temperature rise is calculated as
TempRise ' T_c Ambient.
(f) The rotor temperature T_r is calculated as in the DegCW model:
T_r ' T_c + (T_wdg T_rtr).
Thus ThR_ws represents the "diffusion resistance" of conduction through
the stator yoke. A suitable value can be calculated using the Hot10
model as R_yfd. It is likely to be less significant than ThRSlot or
R_fa, and so only a small value is usually appropriate. {0} [EC/W]
HTC Heat transfer coefficient used to define the thermal resistance R_fa
from the frame surface to ambient, i.e., ThR_fs = 1/(h FSArea), as in
(a) above. [W/m
2
/EC or W/in
2
/EC]
HTTC Temperature coefficient of HTC. [p.u./EC or p.u./EF] {0}
Note that HTC and HTTC are also used to calculate convection in the Hot10 and
Hot16 models when CalcFAV = HTC.

Fixed Temperatures for Specific Operating Points
When TorqCalc includes the locked-rotor condition (LR), the winding temperature and
the rotor temperature at locked-rotor are fixed at T_wdg_S and T_rtr_S respectively.
When TorqCalc includes the breakdown condition (Brk), the winding temperature and
the rotor temperature at breakdown are fixed at T_wdg_B and T_rtr_B respectively.
When TorqCalc includes the no-load condition, the winding temperature and the rotor
temperature at locked-rotor are fixed at T_wdg_NL and T_rtr_NL respectively.
These temperatures are not used for any other purpose.
T_wdg_S Winding temperature at locked-rotor (stall).
T_wdg_B Winding temperature at breakdown.
T_wdg_NL Winding temperature at no-load.
T_rtr_B Rotor at breakdown.
T_rtr_S Rotor temperature at locked-rotor (stall).
T_rtr_NL Rotor temperature at no-load.
Parameters required for calculating the thermal capacitance, time-constant, weights and inertia
The remaining parameters on the "Thermal" page of Ted are required for calculating
weights and inertia, thermal time-constant, and thermal capacitance.

Specific Heats (Required for Thermal Capacitance)
cp_Cu Specific heat of conductors, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.383 (Cu)}
cp_SFe Specific heat of stator laminations, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.450 (Steel)}
cp_RFe Specific heat of rotor steel, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.450}
cp_Bars Specific heat of rotor bars and end-ring. [kJ/ kg EC] {0.896 (Al)}
cp_Frame Specific heat of frame material, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.896 (Al)}
cp_Shaft Specific heat of shaft material, [kJ/kg EC] {0.450}
The thermal capacitances calculated with these specific heats are described on p.
?.

Additional thermal capacitances
Additional thermal capacitances are intended to make fine adjustments in the Hot10
or Hot16 thermal transient models, but they also have an effect on the thermal
capacitance and the thermal time-constant even when simpler thermal models are used.
For that reason they appear on the first Thermal page of Ted, but in most cases it
will be acceptable to leave them all zero.
Most of the additional thermal capacitances (AddC_) are identified by the
corresponding node letter in the Hot10 thermal model, p. 175. PC-IMD does not
calculate C_g the capacitance at node G, but sets it to the value C_Frame/10 if
AddC_g = 0, or to AddC_g otherwise. Similarly C_Brg is set to C_Shaft/5 if AddC_B
= 0, or to AddC_B otherwise. {0} [kJ/EC]
The following table shows the usage of the additional thermal capacitances. Note
that "[]" means "includes".
Used for thermal capacitance
C_motor
Used in Hot10 thermal model
Stator winding: C_Cu [AddC_Cu] C_e ' (C_Cu [AddC_Cu]) 1 X (node E)
C_c ' (C_Cu [AddC_Cu]) X (node C)
where X = 2 * Lstk/MLT
Stator iron :
C_SFe [AddC_Y + AddC_T]
C_t (from WtFeSt/2) [AddC_T] (nodes S,T)
C_y (from WtFeSy) [AddC_Y] (node Y)
Rotor iron : C_RFe [AddC_R]
Rotor Cage : C_Cage [AddC_Cg]
If R_dr is non-zero, C_r is used at node R (rotor
body) and C_Cage at node D (rotor bars). But if
R_dr = 0, node D is merged with node R and the
combined thermal capacitance C_RFe C_Cage is
used.
Frame : C_Frame [AddC_F] C_Frame (node F)
Shaft : C_Shaft [AddC_H] C_Shaft (node H)
Airgap : C_g [AddC_G] C_g (node G)
Bearing : C_Brg [AddC_B] C_Brg (node B)
Table showing usage of thermal capacitances and additional thermal capacitances
Some of the thermal capacitances are redistributed in the Hot16 thermal model, to
allow for temperature variation in the axial direction: see p. 89.
Frame dimensions
FrLgthM "Frame length mode": this parameter specifies how the frame length
LFrame is determined. (See Fig. 77).
Actual LFrame = FrLgth
Add LFrame = Lstk + FrLgth
Scale LFrame = Lstk FrLgth
FrLgth Frame axial length parameter. If FrLgthM = Add, a plus sign is
appended, and if FrLgth = Scale, an asterisk is appended.
FrThk Frame radial thickness. See Fig. 77.
CapThk Thickness of one end-cap. See Fig. 77.
N_Fins No. of fins on the outside of the stator frame. Fins are assumed to
run axially along the outer surface of the frame. See Fig. 78. {0}
LFin Fin length in the radial direction. See Fig. 78. [mm] {0}
FinThk Fin thickness. See Fig. 78. [mm] {0}
FrDens Density of frame and end-caps. [kg/m
3
] {2700 (Aluminium)}
3.2.7 TedHot10/Hot16thermalmodels
The Hot10 and Hot16 thermal models are transient solvers that produce the
temperature-vs-time curves shown in Fig. 34 on p. 35.
They use the thermal equivalent-circuit network shown in Fig. 110 on p. 175. The
first-order differential equations in temperature-vs-time are solved by Eulers
method with an integration time-step thm_dt [sec]. The duration of the transient
is set by hTime [minutes].
Because of the extra sophistication these models require more input data, and
produces a lot more output data, than the simple thermal models considered so far.
Care is required in setting up the parameters, to ensure a stable calculation. The
input data is spread over three pages of Ted.
The descriptions in the following pages concern mainly the Hot10 model; the
additional features of the Hot16 model are covered on p. 89.
Initial temperatures for transient thermal calculation
Initial temperatures (IT_) are identified by node letter, F, Y, T, C, E, S, G, R,
H, B. These temperatures are used only for initialising the Hot10 and Hot16 thermal
models, and should not be confused with the "set" temperatures T_wdg, T_rtr used
in the simple thermal models.
Thermal node types
Thermal node types (tnt_) are identified by node letter, F, Y, T, C, E, S, G, R, H,
B. All nodes except A can be Fixed or Floating. If fixed, the temperature remains
at the initial value; if floating, it is solved along with all the other
temperatures. The choice of node type may affect the solution time and even the
stability of the solution. Generally speaking it is advisable to use the floating
type for all nodes.
Setting a thermal node type to Fixed forces heat to flow to or from surrounding
nodes to keep it at the specified temperature. This is an artificial situation
because it may require absurd values of heat flow inconsistent with what else is
going on in the motor. Therefore it is advisable to use this option with extreme
care, and to set tnt = Fixed only when you are confident that you are modelling a
realistic situation.
If a node is to be "disconnected" from the thermal model, it is not sufficient to
set its node type to fixed; indeed this does not disconnect it at all, Therefore,
to "disconnect" a node it is best to set its node type to floating and set the
interconnecting thermal resistances to high values (e.g. 10 or 100 EC/W, not 10
3
or
10
6
otherwise the solution may be slowed down or destabilized by making the
differential equations too "stiff" (i.e., having a mixture of very short and very
long thermal time-constants in the eigenvalues).
Control parameters for transient thermal calculation
thm_dt The default value of the integration time-step. This should have a
value of perhaps 1/10 the shortest thermal time-constant in the model.
It is better to have thm_dt too small rather than too large. Note that
the graphs on p. 35 are sampled such that only 120 points are plotted,
although this has no effect on the solution. {1} [s]
hTime The duration of the transient calculation. If the integration is
interrupted before a steady-state has been reached, the temperatures
are frozen at the values they had at hTime. {100} [min]
XThLoss Scale factor for all loss components. By setting XThLoss = 0, the
motor is effectively "switched off" and the Hot10 model can then be
used to observe the rate at which it cools down, provided that the
initial temperatures are set to suitable values.
HBalTol This parameter is used to test whether a steady state has been reached
at the end of the transient, when t ' hTime. If it has, the output
parameter Hot10ss is set to "true".
The test is to compare the final total rate of heat absorption in the
thermal capacitances with HBalTol. The comparison is done using the
normalized heat absorption i_Absorp/WTotal. When this ratio falls
below HBalTol, a steady state is deemed to have been attained, even
though the temperatures may still be a few degrees away from their
final values.
The thermal time-constants of electric motors are quite long (typically
of the order of 20 min for small motors to 1 or more hours for large
ones). Therefore it may be advantageous to consider that a steady
state has been reached when the absorption rate is still observable, by
setting HBalTol to a value that is not too small. {0.05}
T_max Maximum allowable temperature in Hot10 thermal model. If the
temperature at any node exceeds this value, the calculation is
interrupted. {250EC}
Weighting factors for iron and stray-load loss
The distribution of iron and stray-load loss between the Y, T, S, and R nodes in
Fig. 110 can be adjusted using these weighting factors. They should sum to 1.
XWFe_Y Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node Y, [p.u.] {0.5}
XWFe_T Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node T, [p.u.] {0.5}
XWFe_S Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node S, [p.u.] {0}
XWFe_R Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node R, [p.u.] {0}
Node-to-node thermal resistances
Node-to-node thermal resistances thR_ are identified by the respective pair of node
letters, e.g. thR_CT for the resistance from the conductors C to the tooth T.
There are three main types of thermal resistance in PC-IMDs Hot10 model: frame-to-
ambient, calculable, and non-calculable. The parameter settings are important
because they determine the eigenvalues of the solution matrix, which determines the
stability of the solution. It pays to work through all these parameters making
careful decisions about each one.
Frame-to-ambient thermal resistances
There are three main frame-to-ambient thermal resistances in parallel, representing
different methods of heat transfer. They are differentiated from one another by an
additional subscript letter:
U : thR_FAU = thermal Resistance, Frame to Ambient, by condUction
V : thR_FAV = thermal Resistance, Frame to Ambient, by condVection
R : thR_FAR = thermal Resistance, Frame to Ambient, by Radiation
There is also a fourth frame-to-ambient thermal resistance which is not based on
physical calculations, but is an empirical parameter based on a statistical survey
of motors of a certain size, and published by G. Kylander, [30]:
K : thR_FAK = thermal Resistance, Frame to Ambient, by Kylanders formula.
Generally speaking, the Kylander formula should be used by itself, with the others
switched off. Alternatively the other three should be used together, with
Kylanders formula switched off.
CalcFAU Method of calculating frame-to-ambient thermal resistance by
conduction.
None There is no heat conduction from the frame.
Fixed The thermal conduction resistance is fixed, thR_FAU
Plate The thermal resistance is defined in terms of a
standard heatsink in the form of a plate of certain
dimensions.

ThR_FAU Fixed thermal resistance representing frame-to-ambient conduction, used
when CalcFAU = Fixed. {1@5} [EC/W]
CalcFAV Method of calculating frame-to-ambient thermal resistance by
convection.
None There is no heat convection from the frame
Fixed The thermal convection resistance is fixed, thR_FAV
HTC The thermal resistance R_fa is calculated using the
heat transfer coefficient HTC on Ted/1, together with
the frame surface area : see formula on p. 76.
Air The thermal resistance R_fa is calculated using
empirical formulas given on p. 87. Additional
parameters are required to describe the nature of the
convection, as described on p. 87.
ThR_FAV Fixed thermal resistance representing frame-to-ambient convection, used
when CalcFAV = Fixed. {1@5} [EC/W]
CalcFAR Method of calculating frame-to-ambient thermal resistance by radiation.
None There is no heat radiation from the frame.
Fixed The thermal radiation resistance is fixed, thR_FAR
Calculate The thermal resistance is computed using the standard
fourth-power law and the absolute temperature of the
frame surface, together with the emissivity, p. 88.

ThR_FAR Fixed thermal resistance representing frame-to-ambient radiation, used
when CalcFAR = Fixed. {1@5} [EC/W]
CalcFAK Method of calculating frame-to-ambient thermal resistance by Kylanders
formula.
None Kylanders thermal resistance is not active
Fixed The thermal radiation resistance is fixed, thR_FAK
Calculate The thermal resistance is computed using Kylanders
empirical formulation, p. 88.

ThR_FAK Fixed thermal resistance representing frame-to-ambient radiation, used
when CalcFAR = Fixed. {1@5} [EC/W]

Calculable thermal resistances
A lower-case initial "t" indicates a thermal resistance that will be calculated by
PC-IMD if set to zero in Ted. The design sheet will display the calculated value
with the initial "th" removed. For example if thR_CT = 0 in Ted, the design sheet
will display the calculated value R_ct.
The tables beginning on p. 86 describe the methods briefly, and specifies additional
parameters required for the internal calculations.
A calculable thermal resistance can be specified directly by a non-zero value, which
simply disables the internal calculation and substitutes the specified non-zero
value.

Non-calculable thermal resistances
Non-calculable thermal resistances are those that cannot be calculated internally
by PC-IMD. They have an upper-case initial "T" and must be specified in EC/W.
Disconnecting thermal resistances from the model
Thermal resistances cannot be disconnected from the calculation but they can be made
ineffective by setting a high value, e.g. 10 or 100. Do not use extreme values.

Forced heat extraction rates
Forced heat extraction can be applied at nodes G,F,H and C. These cooling rates
represent fixed amounts of heat abstraction in watts: unlike the normal heat
transfer mechanisms, they do not vary with temperature or the dimensions of the
model. They should therefore be used with caution when you are confident that you
are modelling a realistic situation. Negative values mean heat added.
BlowCool Forced heat extraction from the airgap, node G. [W] {0}
OverCool Forced heat extraction from the frame, node F. [W] {0}
AxleCool Forced heat extraction from the shaft, node H. [W] {0}
WireCool Forced heat extraction from the stator conductors, node C. [W] {0}

Forced Air Cooling
These parameters apply only with the Hot16 model. See p. 91.
Parameters needed for calculable thermal resistances
ct_Liner Thermal conductivity of slot-liner, [W/mEC] {0.2}
ct_Wins Thermal conductivity of wire insulation, [W/mEC] {0.2}
ct_lam Thermal conductivity of laminations, [W/mEC] {38}
ct_Frame Thermal conductivity of frame and end-caps, [W/mEC] {150}
ct_Oxide Thermal conductivity of oxide layer surrounding rotor bars. See
BarOxide and p. 89 [W/mEC] {0@1}
rx_yf Thermal resistance per m
2
of contact area between the stator yoke and
the frame. This is intended as an alternative to AirFilm and can be set
to zero when AirFilm is used. See p. 86. [EC/W m
2
]. {0.002}
XFSArea Adjustment factor for both FSArea and FFArea.
BarOxide Thickness of oxide layer surrounding rotor bars, used to calculate
R_dr. See ct_Oxide and p. 89. Also see Fig. 47. [W/mEC] {0@1}
AirFilm Thickness of air film between stator yoke and frame, used to calculated
R_yfa, which is a component of R_yf : see p. 86. Also see Fig. 47 on
page 91. [mm] {0}
AirLiner Thickness of air layer surrounding slot-liner. This can significantly
increase R_ct and R_cy. The thermal conductivity of air is calculated
internally as a function of the temperature. [mm] {0}
R_yfd ' ln
Rad3
Rad2
1
2ct_lamLStkStf
EC/W.
R_yf ' R_yfc R_yfd R_yfa
R_yfc '
rx_yf
A
yf
EC/W.
R_yfa '
AirFilm
k A
yf
EC/W.
Additional parameters needed for thermal conduction resistances
thR_ Required parameters and method of calculation
thR_CT Liner, ct_Liner, Slots, ct_Wins, SFn, AirLiner and motor geometry.
The thermal resistance of the liner is calculated from the liner
contact area. It is added to a diffusion resistance that represents
heat transfer through the conductor array within the slot, and depends
on the thermal conductivity of the wire insulation and the slot-fill
factor. thR_CT and thR_CY are in parallel and are proportioned
according to the relative contact areas along the sides of the teeth
and the bottom of the slot.
thR_CY
thR_TY ct_Lam, Slots and motor geometry. R_ts is equal to R_ty. Together they
represent thermal diffusion by conduction in the radial direction
along the stator teeth. thR_TS
thR_CE Winding details and thermal conductivity of copper (395 W/m EC). R_ce
represents thermal diffusion by conduction along the stator winding
in the axial direction.
thR_YF ct_lam, rx_yf AirFilm, and geometry. R_yf has three components in
series:
For thermal diffusion by conduction through the cylindrical stator
yoke:
For a resistive layer with imperfect thermal contact between the
yoke and the frame :
and for thin air film between the yoke and the frame :
where k is the thermal conductivity of air at the temperature T_f.
The two last components are intended as alternatives, depending on
whichever method of characterizing the imperfect thermal contact is
most convenient.
thR_SG
Internal calculation uses the properties of air at the temperature
T_g. See [30].
thR_RG
thR_RH ct_lam and motor geometry. R_rh represents thermal diffusion by
conduction through the rotor yoke, and is similar to R_yfd above.
h ' h
0N
[T/D]
0@25
W/m
2
/EC
h ' 0@00142 h
0F
V_air/L W/m
2
/EC
Additional parameters needed for thermal convection resistances
thR_FAV h0_N, h0_F, V_air
When CalcFAV = Air, R_fav is computed from one of two empirical
formulas for the convective heat transfer coefficient at the frame
surface : thus R_fav = 1/hA, where A = FSArea, and h is the heat
transfer coeffcient.
Natural convection is specified by setting V_air = 0. Then
where T = T_f - Ambient and D is the frame diameter in mm, equal to
2 (Rad3 + FrThk). A common value is h
0N
= 7@5. Thus with D = 150 mm
and T = 60EC, h = 6@0 W/m
2
/EC.
Forced convection is specified by setting V_air > 0.
If V_air > 0,
where V_air is in ft/min and L is the frame length in in. A common
value is h
0F
' 125, so with V_air = 1000 ft/min and L = 10 in, h = 18
W/m
2
/EC. (V_air is always in ft/min).
The crude formulas for h cannot be used safely without verification.
R_far '
T
AeB(T
4
1
! T
4
0
)
EC/W
R_fak '
1
( C
1
C
2
n
) A
EC/W
Additional parameters needed for thermal radiation resistances
thR_FAR Emiss and frame dimensions. R_far is computed from
where A is the frame surface area FSArea, e is the emissivity of the
frame surface relative to that of a black body (Emiss), and B is a
constant equal to 5@67 10
!8
W/m
2
/K
4
. T
1
is the absolute temperature
of the frame surface T_f + 273@2 K, and T
0
is the absolute ambient
temperature Ambient + 273@2 K. Thus if T = 60EC and e = 0@9, the
implied value of the heat transfer coefficient is T/(R_far A) = 7@0
W/m
2
/EC. The emissivity varies according to the frame surface colour
and texture: less than 0@1 for polished aluminium, or 0@97 for black
lacquer.
thR_FAK KC1, KC2, Kn and motor geometry. This is based on an empirical and
theoretical study by Gunnar Kylander of Chalmers Institute of
Technology, interpreted, tested and modified by J-H Gliemann, [30]:
where C
1
= KC1 {6.7}, C
2
= KC2 {0.96}, n = Kn {0.8}, and is the
speed in mechanical rad/s. The default values are appropriate for a
15-kW motor with a shaft-mounted fan that blows air axially over a
finned frame. For a 4-kW motor, the values suggested are 9@6, 0@86 and
0@8 respectively. The value of C
1
can be identified from locked-rotor
tests at different voltages, and C
2
and n from no-load and load tests
at different speeds.
For example, with C
1
= 6@7, C
2
= 0@96 and n = 0@8, the implied value of
the heat transfer coefficient at 3000 rpm is given by 1/(R_fak A)
= 102 W/m
2
EC.
thR_DR BarOxide, ct_Oxide (see below)
The Hot16 thermal model
The main difference between the Hot16 thermal model and the Hot10 model is that the
temperature can vary in the axial direction (parallel to the shaft), in the frame,
the stator conductors, and the rotor bars. Mathematically, dT/dz is non-zero in
these components. In all other components, there is no z-variation of temperature.
Thermal models which include axial temperature variation are inherently complicated,
and often use several "slices" or layers which greatly increase the number of nodes.
The Hot16 model does not use this approach. It is a hybrid model in which
(a) each of the three "dT/dz" components is modelled by an analytical
solution of the heat conduction equation, allowing for internal heat
generation and lateral heat transfer to the adjacent components;
(b) the temperatures at the centres of the "dT/dz" components are linked to
the remainder of the Hot10 model, providing boundary conditions which
determine the solution T(z) in each component;
(c) the entire model is solved by recursion, using Eulers method to
integrate the first-order differential equations in dT/dt; and
(d) forced air cooling is applied at the end-nodes, F1, F2, E1, E2, R1 and
R2 in Fig. 47.
In the original Hot10 model the three "dT/dz" components (frame, stator conductors
and rotor bars) were modelled by single nodes F, C and R. To accommodate different
temperatures (and different rates of change of temperature) at the two ends, these
nodes have to be split into two. The following table shows how this is done. On
the left we can see that the Hot10 model had a limited representation of axial
temperature variation in the stator conductors, in that it distinguished between the
end-winding temperatures (node E) and the conductor temperature (node C) at the
central plane of the motor, although both end-windings were at the same temperature.
Original
Hot10 model
Hot16 model
Drive End
(DE)
Average Opposite
Drive End
(ODE)
F Frame F1 F F2
E C E
Stator
conductors
E1 C E2
R
Rotor bars R1 D R2
Rotor body R
Arrangement of nodes in Hot16 model to allow for axial temperature variation
Capacity nodes are shown with boldface letters
The Hot16 model has node F1 at the drive end and F2 at the opposite-drive end.
These are called "capacity" nodes because the thermal capacitance of the frame is
assumed to be divided equally between them, and their temperatures T_f1 and T_f2 are
the result of integrating the thermal differential equations at nodes F1 and F2.
The F node is now used to represent the average temperature along the section of
frame in contact with the stator laminations (Lstk).
F is no longer a capacity node but an "algebraic" node, because its temperature T_f
is calculated algebraically from T_f1 and T_f2, using the solution formula for the
heat-conduction equation mentioned earlier.
In the stator-conductor component, the end-windings are represented by nodes E1 and
E2, and the C node represents the average temperature within Lstk.
In the rotor-bar component, the end-rings are represented by nodes R1 and R2, and
node D is introduced to represent the average temperature along the slot-bound
length Lstk. Node R "migrates" to the rotor body. The thermal capacitance C_Cage/2
is assigned at each of nodes R1 and R2, and the remaining thermal capacitance C_RFe
(rotor iron) at node R. Node D is an algebraic node constrained by T_r1 and T_r2.
In order to allow axial temperature variation, there must be a finite thermal
resistance between the "dT/dz" components and the adjacent components with which
they are in contact. These massive components are the stator and rotor lamination
packs, which are assumed to have no axial temperature variation. For the stator
conductors there is always a thermal resistance across the slot-liners, augmented
by the diffusion resistance through the conductor array within the slot, and by an
additional (optional) air layer (AirLiner) which lies next to the slot-liner.
Around the rotor bars an oxide layer, thickness BarOxide, is postulated with thermal
conductivity ct_Oxide, giving just sufficient thermal resistance to allow the rotor
bar temperature to vary along the length. The formulation includes the heat
transfer across this oxide layer, and the layer is also characterized by an
equivalent thermal resistance R_dr which appears in the design sheet.
Similarly for the interface between the stator yoke and the frame, an optional air
layer is postulated, with thickness AirFilm and thermal conductivity calculated from
internal functions which take into account the temperature at that location.
Because of the high thermal conductivity of copper and aluminium, the temperature
difference between the ends is likely to be fairly small, even when there is a great
disparity of air cooling between the two ends. Indeed it is theoretically possible
for all the heat to be taken out at one end of the F, C and R components without
producing a very large temperature difference between the ends.
Because the axial heat-conduction is represented by a steady-state formula, it can
be seen that the Hot16 model is a hybrid solver that is applying static constraints
to a dynamic system. Moreover it is a "coarse" model in the sense that the entire
thermal capacitance of each component is lumped into two nodes, even though the
transient thermal diffusion is an inherently continuous process. However, once the
final steady-state is attained, the errors arising from these limitations should be
relatively insignificant, and it can be assumed that the main price paid for the
speed and simplicity of the model is in the transient part of the solution, rather
than in the final steady state.
It should be pointed out that the Hot16 model relies on the assumption that there
is no axial temperature variation in the massive stator and rotor core-packs. This
is somewhat in conflict with the fact that these components have much lower thermal
conductivity in the z-direction than in the radial direction. On the other hand,
the ends of the core-packs are probably not as accessible to the streams of cooling
air, and so the transport of heat from one end to the other will be mainly in the
three "dT/dz" components: frame, stator conductors, and rotor bars.
The heat transfer by forced air cooling is modelled by heat-transfer coefficients
CHT_F1, CHT_E1, CHT_R1, (at the drive end) and CHT_F2, CHT_E2 and CHT_R2 (at the
opposite-drive end) which have been specially formulated for the Hot16 model. At the
drive end, the airflow Qair_1 [cfm or m
3
/s] is assumed to pass over the end-nodes
in the order R1, E1, F1; and Qair_2 at the opposite-drive end through R2, E2, F2.
The air entry temperature at the drive end is Ti_1, and its exhaust temperature is
To_1. Between nodes R1 and E1 it attains the temperature TRE_1, and between nodes
E1 and F1 the temperature TEF_1, the air being assumed to pass over the three
components in series. Likewise the temperatures TRE_2 and TEF_2 are obtained at the
opposite-drive end.
Recirculation of air is shown in Fig. 47 and is represented by the parameters Uair_1
and Uair_2.
As with all thermal models, the Hot16 model requires calibration against test data.
It cannot be assumed that its greater complexity automatically provides greater
accuracy.
Fig. 46 Forced air cooling at end-nodes of Hot16 thermal model
Forced air cooling (Hot16 model only)
FACCType "forced-air cooling coefficient type" determines the method of
specifying the heat transfer to the air, at each of the air-cooling
nodes R1, R2, E1, E2, F1 and F2. See SEM-1.
VolSpHt The "VolSpHt" coefficients are an unconventional and
peculiar way of specifying heat transfer in terms of
the watts removed for each unit of air flow rate (in
m
3
/s or ft
3
/min), per EC of temperature difference
between the node and the air. They characterize the
heat transfer without reference to the areas of the
cooled surfaces. The theory is described in SEM-1.
HTC Conventional heat transfer coefficients are applied to
the heat-transfer areas AHT_R1, AHT_E1, etc. shown in
Fig. 48. The heat transfer at each corresponding node
is given by h A T: for example, at node R1
iRQ_1 = HTC_R1 AHT_R1 (T_r1 Ti_1) [W]
Watts A fixed power is removed at each node.
Ti_1 Inlet air temperature at the drive end. [EC or EF].
Ti_2 Inlet air temperature at the opposite-drive end. [EC or EF].
Qair_1 Air flow-rate at the drive end. [cfm (ft
3
/min) or m
3
/s].
Qair_2 Air flow-rate at the drive end. [cfm (ft
3
/min) or m
3
/s].
Uair_1 Percentage recirculation of air at the drive-end. This means that the
effective airflow is Qair_1 (1 - Uair_1/100). {20} [%]
Uair_2 Percentage recirculation of air at the opposite-drive end. {20}[%]
Fig. 47 Definition of heat-transfer areas (FACCType = HTC)
"Volume specific heat" coefficients
These special coefficients are used when FACCType = VolSpHt.
CHT_F1 Heat transfer rate from node F1 to air at the drive-end of the frame.
This is the number of Joules removed from the end of the frame per
cubic metre (or foot) of air, per EC of temperature difference between
the frame node F1 and the passing air at that point. The units of
CHT_F1 etc. are those of a "volume specific heat", i.e., the product of
mass specific heat and density. However, the C coefficients are not
specific heats because they represent heat transfer, not heat storage.
In passing over the drive-end section of the frame, the air temperature
rises from TEF_1 to To_1. {10 J/ft
3
EC} or {300 J/m
3
EC}
CHT_E1 Heat transfer rate from node E1 to air at the end-windings of the
stator at the drive-end. {10 J/ft
3
EC} or {300 J/m
3
EC}
CHT_R1 Heat transfer rate from node R1 to air at the end-rings of the rotor at
the drive-end. {10 J/ft
3
EC} or {300 J/m
3
EC}
CHT_F2 Heat transfer rate from node F2 to air at the opposite-drive end of the
frame. {10 J/ft
3
EC} or {300 J/m
3
EC}
CHT_E2 Heat transfer rate from node E2 to air at the end-windings of the
stator at the opposite-drive end. {10 J/ft
3
EC} or {300 J/m
3
EC}
CHT_R2 Heat transfer rate from node R2 to air at the end-rings of the rotor at
the opposite-drive end. {10 J/ft
3
EC} or {300 J/m
3
EC}
TC_FACC Temperature coefficient applied to all heat transfer coefficients of
the VolSpHt or HTC type (CHT_R1, CHT_E1, .., HTC_R1, HTC_E1, ..). The
"temperature factor" multiplying these coefficients is calculated as
TF = 1 + TC_FACC/100 * (T - 20);
where T is the node temperature. The "base" values of the heat
transfer coefficients are taken at 20EC. [%/EC] {0}
Heat transfer coefficients used when FACCType = HTC
HTC_R1 Heat transfer coefficient over area AHT_R1, Fig. 48. [W/m
2
/EC] {20}
HTC_R2 Heat transfer coefficient over area AHT_R2, Fig. 48. [W/m
2
/EC] {20}
HTC_E1 Heat transfer coefficient over area AHT_E1, Fig. 48. [W/m
2
/EC] {20}
HTC_E2 Heat transfer coefficient over area AHT_E2, Fig. 48. [W/m
2
/EC] {20}
HTC_F1 Heat transfer coefficient over area AHT_F1, Fig. 48. [W/m
2
/EC] {20}
HTC_F2 Heat transfer coefficient over area AHT_F2, Fig. 48. [W/m
2
/EC] {20}
Powers (watts) used when FACCType = Watts
R1_Cool Forced heat transfer at node R1. [W] {0}
R2_Cool Forced heat transfer at node R2. [W] {0}
E1_Cool Forced heat transfer at node E1. [W] {0}
E2_Cool Forced heat transfer at node E2. [W] {0}
F1_Cool Forced heat transfer at node F1. [W] {0}
F2_Cool Forced heat transfer at node F2. [W] {0}
Dimensions shown in Fig. 48, expressed in terms of PC-IMD parameters:
a ' (LaxPack Lstk)/2
b ' SD_S
c ' BarExt + ERthk + RFinL
d ' (EROD ERID)/2
e ' (LFrame Lstk)/2
The following equations give the areas of heat transfer associated with nodes R, E,
F. (Subscript 1 refers to the drive end (DE) and subscript 2 to the opposite-drive end (ODE). These
subscripts are omitted in the equations).
AHT_R ' Bc (EROD + ERID) B/4 (EROD
2
ERID
2
)
AHT_E ' 2Ba (2 Rad2 b) B [Rad2
2
(Rad2 b)
2
]
AHT_F ' 2Be Rad3 (Rad3
2
RadSH
2
)
3.2.8 TedTestData
No-load and Locked-rotor Test Data
For 3-phase wye-connected motors, PC-IMD provides a facility for deriving the
equivalent-circuit parameters from standard test data, which includes the no-load
and locked-rotor tests. See SEM-3.
TestPts Determines which test points are available.
None No test points are available.
NL + LR No-load and locked rotor. This is the commonest
combination, since the no-load and locked-rotor
tests are standard.

R1_test Tested (measured) value of stator resistance. This is required for the
computation of equivalent-circuit parameters from the no-load and
locked-rotor tests, and it is usually measured separately. [ohm]
uX1oX2 User-specified value of the ratio X
1
/X
2
in the derived equivalent
circuit. As is well known (and explained in SEM-3), the total leakage
reactance obtained from the locked-rotor test cannot be uniquely
apportioned between the stator and the rotor. This problem is
discussed by Veinott [5], who says that sometimes the leakage is
equally divided between stator and rotor, making X
1
' X
2
.
PC-IMD can apportion X
1
and X
2
in any arbitrary ratio uX1oX2. To
apportion X
1
and X
2
equally, set uX1oX2 ' 1. Another meaningful value
is to set uX1oX2 equal to the theoretical ratio X
1
/X
2
coming from PC-IMD
itself. This value is displayed as X1oX2. {1}
VNL_Test Voltage during the no-load test (RMS line-line). [V]
INL_Test No-load line current. [A rms]
PNL_Test No-load power at input terminals (total; all phases combined). [W]
sNL_Test No-load slip. []
fNL_Test No-load test frequency. [Hz]
T1NLTest Temperature of stator winding in no-load test. [EC]
T2NLTest Temperature of rotor in no-load test. [EC]
VLR_Test Voltage during the locked-rotor test (RMS line-line). [V]
ILR_Test Locked-rotor line current. [A rms]
PLR_Test Locked-rotor power at input terminals (all phases combined). [W]
sLR_Test Locked-rotor slip. []
fLR_Test Locked-rotor test frequency. [Hz]
T1LRTest Temperature of stator winding in locked-rotor test. [EC]
T2LRTest Temperature of rotor in locked-rotor test. [EC]
Rated Load Test Data
PC-IMD provides a place to store and display test data for a single operating
point. This test data is not used in any calculations.
V_Test Test value of line-line voltage. [V]
P_Test Test value of input power. [W]
I_Test Test value of line current. [A rms]
s_Test Test value of slip. []
f_Test Test value of supply frequency. [Hz]
T1_Test Test value of stator conductor temperature. [EC]
T2_Test Test value of rotor temperature. [EC]
Wrated Rated power. (Carried for information only).
Irated Rated current. (Carried for information only).
12
A small effect will be observed, unless the circuit tolerance XmTol is set to a very small value.
3.2.9 TedSettings
Methods
This section contains most of the calculation options in PC-IMD, together with many
of the adjustment factors. In routine design work, most of these parameters will
be pre-set. The values are often determined by correlation with test data.
EQcct Specifies the equivalent circuit type used for 3-phase machines:
SPEED PC-IMD uses the standard equivalent circuit based on the
fundamental MMF distribution: see Fig. 4. Harmonic losses
and torques are not calculated.
Alger Algers harmonic equivalent circuit is used; see SEM-3.
The values of resistances and reactances in the harmonic
equivalent circuit are also calculated and included in
the design sheet. The harmonic torques are added to the
shaft torque in the torque/speed characteristic.
RcLoc Specifies the location of the core-loss resistor Rc in the equivalent
circuit, Fig. 4. See SEM-3. The core loss is calculated from the
flux-density waveforms and therefore RcLoc has no effect on WFe.
12
GapFlux Rc is connected in parallel with Xm, as in Fig. 4.
AllFlux Rc is connected between R1 and X1, as indicated by the
dotted line in Fig. 4. In this position it is
connected "across all the flux".
AllVolts Rc is connected at the terminals. In this position it
is connected "across all the volts".
The location of Rc does not affect performance calculations in PC-IMD,
but it is significant in the theory of the L and equivalent circuits,
(SEM-3). To check the theory of the L circuit, use AllFlux.
IncHx Determines the space-harmonics of stator MMF that will be included in
calculating the torque/speed characteristic. (Split-phase only).
1 Only the fundamental is used
13 Fundamental + third (important in split-phase motors)
1,3,5 etc Fundamental + third + fifth, etc
If IncHx > 1 and TapType = None, the iron loss is not included in the equivalent circuit:
as a result the power balance is not observed (i.e., Pelec Pshaft + WTotal). A more
precise calculation is obtained by setting TapType = Base and Tap = 0.
uX1oX2 User-specified value of the ratio X
1
/X
2
in the derived equivalent
circuit. As explained on p. 94, uX1oX2 can be used to control the
distribution of total leakage reactance between the stator and the
rotor, when the equivalent circuit parameters are being derived from
no-load and locked-rotor test data. uX1oX2 also controls the
equivalent turns ratio for transforming the T-equivalent circuit to the
L-equivalent circuit. If uX1oX2 = 0, this ratio is determined by
X1oX2, which is the ratio X1/X2 taken from PC-IMDs internal
calculations. See SEM-3.
MagCalc Selects the method used for magnetic field analysis, and in particular
the fundamental space-harmonic of the airgap flux distribution, which
determines the relationship between the EMF E1 and the flux-densities
in the airgap, teeth, yoke, etc.
Classical Uses the "60E method" (2,3). This method uses only a
single "Ampres Law" contour positioned at 30E from
the peak of the airgap flux-density distribution in an
attempt to make it independent of the third-harmonic
component of the effect of saturation on this
distribution. Although the method is fast, it is
unsuitable for highly saturated machines.
SPEED This method uses a space-harmonic analysis of the air-
gap field in which the stator MMF distribution is
represented by its fundamental component and the
saturated airgap flux-density distribution is computed
by a relaxation method, which includes allowances for
slot flux; [18]. The magnetic circuit is discretized
into 21 points per half-pole.
IncShaft Determines how the shaft is treated in the magnetic circuit.
No shaft The shaft is not included in the magnetic
calculations.
AdjRYthk The rotor yoke thickness is adjusted to accommodate
the effect of the shaft, which is magnetically in
parallel with it.
Comp. BH A composite BH curve is determined for the parallel
combination of the rotor yoke and the shaft. This
method is intended for 2-pole motors only.
The AdjRYthk and Comp. BH methods are described in SEM-3.
XmTol Adjustment factor for the convergence tolerance in the magnetic circuit
calculation. The default value (1%) is set slack deliberately, to
maximize the speed of calculation. For greater precision, use 0@01 or
even 0@001. [1] {%}
kXm.. User-specified initial value for magnetic saturation factor, defined as
the ratio between the unsaturated and saturated magnetizing reactances
Xm0/Xm. Convergence of the non-linear magnetic field computation will
be faster if the input value of kXm is close to the output value,
although if kXm is within a normal range, (i.e., kXm < 3), the initial
choice does not make much difference. (Typically kXm is in the range
12). {1.5}
DiffLeak Selects the calculation of the differential leakage reactance XDiff:
CGV Uses CG Veinotts theory, [5].
Alger Uses PL Algers theory, [3].
Richter Uses R Richters theory, [8].
SPEED Uses the method developed at the SPEED Laboratory, [18].
User User-specified value XDiff.
DiffSat Specifies the influence of magnetic saturation on the differential
leakage reactances. (Not used if DiffLeak = User).
false The values of the differential leakage reactances are not
influenced by magnetic saturation.
true The effect of the main flux path saturation is considered
and the differential leakage reactances are updated
(according to the value of the saturation factor for the
magnetizing reactance kXm) at each non-linear iteration
during the magnetic circuit computation. The theoretical
support of this approach is provided by Richters method
according to which the differential leakage reactances are
defined and computed as a fraction of the magnetizing
reactance. This concept has been extended to all the
methods that are selected by through DiffLeak.
NHDiff [Only if DiffLeak = Richter or SPEED]. The upper limit for the series
summation of MMF harmonics used to compute the differential leakage
coefficient. Recommended values are 100 if DiffLeak = SPEED, or 1000
if DiffLeak = Richter. The convergence of the series summation in the
SPEED method is naturally improved due to the consideration of the
slot opening effect. The result also depends on the winding
configuration. The convergence for a particular design can be studied
by changing the value of NHDiff and watching the computed value of
X1diff. For the rotor cage, owing to the complexity of the series
summation, both SPEED and Richter methods use Richter's formulae.
XDiff.. User-specified differential leakage reactance, [ohm/phase] (only if
DiffLeak = User). The same value is used for both stator and rotor.
Alzz Selects one of a number of variants of differential leakage calculation
when DiffLeak ' Alger. (See SEM-3).
Normal This is Algers recommended method for computing zig-zag
reactance, with zero belt leakage. It includes an estimate
of the effect of slot-openings and the fringing around
them, and gives an intermediate value between "Closed" and
"NoFringe".
Closed Similar to "Normal", but with no estimate of the effect of
slot-openings or the fringing around them. This gives a
higher result than "Normal", and is independent of the
slot-openings on the stator or the rotor.
NoFringe Similar to "Normal", but with a simple estimate of the
slot-openings in which fringing is neglected. This gives
a lower result than "Normal".
XmHx The entire differential leakage reactance is computed from
a subset of undamped harmonic magnetizing reactances, those
which appear in the Alger equivalent circuit (see SEM-3).
This includes undamped belt-leakage and tends to give a
high value for the differential leakage reactance.
LkSat controls the method of calculating the saturated stator and rotor
leakage reactances X1 and X2, together with the saturation factors
kX1slot, kX2slot, and kzz.
PC-IMD provides several alternative methods, all of which are based on
approximate analysis. Because of the complexity of leakage saturation,
the only way to assess the accuracy is to compare PC-IMD with test
data, particularly locked-rotor current, torque, and power-factor; and
preferably also the same parameters at breakdown and normal load.
None When LkSat = None, kzz, kX1slot and kX2slot are all equal to
1, but if DiffSat is true and DiffLeak <> User, X1 and X2
both saturate via the effect of kXDiff (= 1/kXm), which
applies the main flux saturation factor to the differential
components of the leakage reactances.
To disable all saturation effects in X1 and X2, set LkSat =
None, DiffLeak = false, muPlug = 1, and (for closed rotor
slots) XErb = 0. Also note that if XkX1slot = 0, the
saturation calculation is disabled for the stator slots,
while if XkX2slot = 0, it is disabled for the rotor slots.
Similarly zig-zag saturation is disabled if Xkzz = 0.
Norman The basis of Norman's method is an empirical reduction factor
kzz for "zig-zag" leakage, which depends on the combined
stator and rotor currents in the slots. This same factor is
used to contract the tooth-heads, resulting in a dilation of
the slot-openings which are then used to estimate saturation
factors kX1slot and kX2slot. Saturated leakage reactances X1s
and X2s are then obtained from
X1s = XXL1 * (X1slot*kX1slot + X1diff*kXDiff + X1end + X1skew)
X2s = XXL2 * (X2slot*kX2slot + X2diff*kXDiff + X2end + X2skew)
If DiffSat = true and DiffLeak <> User, the saturation factor
for differential leakage includes the effect of saturation of
the magnetizing reactance: thus kXDiff = kzz/kXm; otherwise
kXDiff is taken simply as kzz.
For the stator, the final saturated value X1 is simply X1s.
Similarly for open rotor slots, X2 = X2s.
For closed rotor slots, (Bar1 = Type0, C-Custom, or any other
type with muPlug = 0), PC-IMD adds the variable reactance
corresponding to Erb to obtain the saturated rotor leakage
reactance X2, as depicted in Fig. 49. Thus
X2 := X2s + Erb/I2,
where I2 is the rotor current and X2s is the saturated
reactance value in the equation given earlier. (Erb itself is
unaffected by the current). For polyphase motors the
saturation factors are automatically updated in the iterative
circuit calculation since they depend on the flux level and
the current. For single-phase motors this updating is
dependent on SatX1X2. To include skew in the analysis, the
rotor can be divided into NLkSat axial sections.
Note that Erb can cause X2 to exceed X2unsat. This can be
justified by attributing Erb to "bridge flux" that is not
included in X2s.
See also NeqnR and NeqnS on page 100.
Fig. 48 Saturable rotor leakage reactance X2
Fig. 49 Selection of NeqnR and NeqnS, [29]
NeqnR Choice of slot-type to be used with Normans method, as in Fig. 50.
This choice should be made with reference to the rotor slot shape.
Also note that if muPlug = 0, the rotor slot is considered closed.
N0 No saturation factor is applied, so kX2slot = 1.
N6 kX2slot = 1 dk/P, where dk is a reduction in the rotor slot
permeance coefficient calculated by Norman's eqn. (6), and P is
the unsaturated value of that permeance coefficient. N6 is for
open slot shapes like the one labelled N6 in Fig. 50.
N7 Similar to N6 but recommended for open slot shapes like those
labelled N7 in Fig. 50.
N8 Similar to N6 but recommended for closed slot shapes like
those labelled N8 in Fig. 50.
N9 Similar to N6 but recommended for closed slot shapes like
those labelled N9 in Fig. 50.
NS A saturable permeance coefficient is calculated for the "bridge
flux" and added to the unsaturated permeance coefficient for
the slot below the bridge. Although the method was developed
for closed slots, it also works for open slots. (See SEM-3).
It is intended to replace Erb with a saturable reactance
component, and so it sets Erb = 0.
As pointed out by Norman himself, his analysis does not include
the bridge flux explicitly. For closed slots his cases N8 and
N9 are based on a fictitious "unsaturated" slot-opening t =
0@02" (or 0@508 mm). Like Erb, this is an oversimplified way of
avoiding extreme high values of slot leakage reactance when the
bridge is unsaturated at light load. The NS method is an
attempt to deal with this more rigorously.
NRSO Fictitious rotor slot-opening t to be used with Normans method when
NeqnR = N8 or N9. Normans method works by widening the effective slot-
opening. As shown in Fig. 50, "closed" slots have no slot-opening, so
if NRSO ' 0 Normans method starts with a "square" slot-opening a
1
a
1
.
But if NRSO > 0 we use t = NRSO and the slot-opening becomes a rectangle
t a
1
. This "starting" value of the fictitious slot-opening can be
used to adjust the rotor slot-leakage reactance. But as mentioned
earlier, Norman's equations are written for a value of 0@02" (0@508 mm),
and this value reproduces his results most faithfully, (even though the
default is 0). {0}
When NeqnR = NS, NRSO is used as an adjustment to the rotor slot-
opening. Closed rotor slots of course have no slot-opening, so a
nonzero value of NRSO introduces a fictitious slot-opening. This can
be useful to limit the very large values of X2 that could otherwise
arise at light current (potentially causing convergence problems). A
value such as 0@1 or 0@2 mm will be found to have this beneficial effect
without significantly affecting the value of X2 in the normal working
range. A value of 0@508 mm (0@02") provides the NS calculation with the
same unsaturated "starting point" (slot-opening) as Norman used for his
N8 or N9 methods.
Only small values of NRSO should be used. It is considered only as a
small refinement or a diagnostic parameter, and it should never be made
wider than the main slot. (PC-IMD does not check this).
NeqnS Choice of slot-type to be used with Normans method, as in Fig. 50. This
choice should be made with reference to the stator slot shape. Methods
N8 and N9 should be used only with closed stator slots (obtained with
muWedge = 0). The available options are the same as for NeqnR, except
that NS is not available for the stator. {N6}
XkX1Slot Adjustment factor for the saturation factor for the primary slot
reactance X1slot.
XkX2slot Adjustment factor for the saturation factor for the secondary slot
reactance X2slot.
Xkzz Adjustment factor for kzz.
NLkSat When the rotor is skewed, the spatial phase difference between the
stator and rotor current varies along the length of the machine. PC-
IMD divides the machine into NLkSat axial sections and the MMF that
determines the level of saturation in the leakage reactance is computed
separately in each section, from the phasor difference between the
primary and secondary currents. [only with LkSat = Norman]. {1}
SatX1X2 controls the updating of saturation factors for leakage reactances X1
and X2; used only when Connex = SplitPh, Calc1ph = X-Field, IncHx = 1
and TapType = None. (See Fig. 51 on p. 102).
NoSat The unsaturated leakage reactances X1unsat and X2unsat
are used for the performance calculation. [Although the
design sheet displays saturated values for the "equivalent
balanced 3-phase" calculation, they are not used.]
Fixed Saturated reactances X1 and X2 calculated in the
preliminary "equivalent balanced 3-phase" calculation
are used without updating in the X-Field calculation.
Update X1 and X2 are updated through the X-Field calculation.
Calc1ph FBField SymmCpts XField
TapType Tapped windings G-Type only No All
IncHx MMF harmonics Yes Yes All
SatX1X2 and
LkSat
Saturation of
leakage
reactance
No No Yes
LkSat = Norman
Fig. 50 Split-phase calculation options
Calculations for Split-phase motors
For split-phase and single-phase motors, PC-IMD provides a choice of three main
methods (selected with Calc1ph); see Fig. 51.
SPEED regards the X-Field method as the pre-eminent calculation method. The FBField
and SymmCpts methods are simpler methods that were developed earlier and have not
received much enhancement since their original formulation. They will generally give
the same results as the X-Field method if the iron loss is set to zero by using XFe
= 0, because the method of handling iron loss is the main theoretical difference
between these methods. However, the FBField and SymmCpts methods do not include
leakage saturation or MMF harmonics.
Leakage saturation (of X1 and X2) can be included in the X-Field method if SatX1X2
= Fixed or Update, but only if IncHx = 1. If MMF harmonics are important, X-Field
can still be used with IncHx > 1, but then the leakage saturation is not available.
The Tap-winding methods are based on the X-Field method and are altogether more
complex and sophisticated than the basic methods. They can simultaneously handle
MMF harmonics (if IncHx > 1) and leakage saturation of X1 and X2, (but only with
LkSat = Norman).
The Tap-winding methods can calculate ordinary untapped windings if Tap = 0. This
means in principle that they can include leakage saturation and MMF harmonics for
all cases. However, SPEED generally recommends the use of the simplest method that
will do the job, and we also recommend checking the methods against each other.
EndLeak Method of calculating end-winding leakage reactance.
SPEED The stator end-winding inductance is calculated from a
classical formula for circular coils, assuming one
semicircle at each end of the machine. Mutual
inductances between end-turns of adjacent coils are
ignored.
CGV The stator end-winding inductance is calculated from
Veinotts eqn. (17-30) [5], and the rotor end-ring
inductance is set to zero.
Alger The stator end-winding inductance is calculated using
Algers method (eqn. 7.103, [3]) and the end-ring
inductance is given the same value.
Richter The stator end-winding inductance is calculated from
Richters formula which depends on the weighted average
end-winding length, the number of pole-pairs, and a
coefficient depending on the value of EndWType.
Postnikov The stator end-winding inductance is calculated from
Postnikovs formula which depends on the weighted
average end-winding length, the weighted average throw,
the number of pole-pairs, and a coefficient depending
on the value of EndWType. [20]
User The stator end-winding reactance is specified as
X1end.., and the rotor end-ring reactance as X2end...
When EndLeak = SPEED, Richter, or Postnikov the inductance of the end-
rings is computed using Postnikovs formula. [20]
EndWType Type of end-winding. With EndLeak = Richter or Postnikov, EndWType
determines the value of a multiplying coefficient in the formula for
stator end-winding inductance:
EndWType Meaning Richter
coefficient
Postnikov
coefficient
1Ly2T 1 layer, 2 tiers 0.3 0.67
1Ly3T 1 layer, 3 tiers 0.225 0.47
2Ly 2 layers 0.15 0.34
Other Other
configurations
0.15 0.34
X1end.. User-specified stator end-winding leakage reactance at the line
frequency Freq. [ohm]. (Used only when EndLeak = User). The two dots
in the name serve to identify this as an input parameter, distinguishing
it from X1end the output parameter.
X2end.. User-specified rotor end-winding leakage reactance at the line frequency
Freq. [ohm]. (Used only when EndLeak = User).
CoilFill CoilFill is used to make small adjustments to the end-winding inductance
(only if EndLeak = SPEED). It represents the "fill factor" for the
strands of wire in the end-windings of one coil or "coil head". If the
strands are tightly bunched, the end-winding inductance will increase;
see SEM-2. In the calculation of end-turn inductance the cross-section
area of the end-coil is multiplied by 1/CoilFill. Use values between 0@3
and 1, lower values for loosely bunched strands and higher values for
tightly-bunched strands. {1}
kEndCoil The average coupling coefficient between end-coils of the same coil-
group : see SEM-2. (Only used if EndLeak = SPEED). Like CoilFill, this
is intended for small adjustment to the end-winding inductance. To the
extent that they are useful at all, both parameters are likely to be
more useful for 2-pole motors, in which the end-winding inductance is
more significant as a proportion of the total inductance. {0@7}
XX1end Adjustment factor for X1end. This parameter provides a more direct
means of adjusting the stator end-winding inductance, but unlike
CoilFill and kEndCoil, it has no theoretical basis and is really nothing
more than a brazen fudge-factor. {1}
XX2end Adjustment factor for X2end. {1}
Interbar Determines whether the interbar calculation is used. If Interbar = SPEED
or Weppler, the secondary resistance R2 and leakage reactance X2 are
modified to take account of the currents flowing between bars across the
rotor laminations. See IBRes. See Ref. [31]. The "interbar"
calculations should be treated as experimental and not used for
systematic design work; probably this calculation will change in a
future version. {Off}
IBRes Interbar resistance controlling the current flow between adjacent rotor
bars, typically dominated by the interface resistance between the bar
and the wall of the rotor slot and therefore expressed in ohms per
square millimetre of contact area. [ohm/mm
2
] {0.075}
DeepBar Selects the method for calculating the deep-bar effect:
Unity No skin-effect factor is applied.
Classical The classical method is based on the analysis of a
rectangular open slot and will provide only approximate
results for other geometries, [3].
Boldea The rotor bars are divided into a stack of 50 layers and
a recursive method is used to calculate the skin effect,
[17]. The method works for any bar shape.
When EQcct = Alger, the rotor resistance components associated with
high-frequency harmonics are subject to skin-effect, but in this case
PC-IMD uses Alger's simplified formula [3, pg. 337].
XKr_DB Adjustment factor for deep-bar coefficient K_r for skin-effect in rotor
conductors. If XKr_DB ' 0 or 1, it has no effect. {1}
XKx_DB Adjustment factor for deep-bar coefficient K_x for skin-effect in rotor
conductors. If XKx_DB ' 0 or 1, it has no effect. {1}
NonLin Selects the type of modelling for the magnetization branch parameters:
true The per/phase saturable magnetizing reactance Xm and the
per/phase core-loss equivalent resistance Rc are
considered to be dependent on the machine operating point
and are computed iteratively taking into account the non-
linear B/H curve of the iron. See MagCalc.
false Xm and Rc are kept constant, equal to the input values
Xm.. and Rc.. respectively. Set XXM = 1 and XFe = 1.
Xm.. (Only if NonLin = false). User-specified magnetizing reactance. The two
dots signify an input parameter. [ohm/phase].
Rc.. (Only if NonLin = false). User-specified core-loss resistance.
[ohms/phase].
s
0
'
R
2
r
1
2
(x
1
X
2
)
2
(15)
Breakdown Calculation
sBrkType Determines the method of searching for the breakdown torque:
Fit This method is intended to be fast. The torque/speed
characteristic in the neighbourhood of the estimated
breakdown point is fitted with a parabola through three
evaluation points, and the peak value is determined by
differentiation of the parabola; Fig. 52.
The Fit algorithm begins by moving a "gauge" of three
points (l,0,u) forwards and backwards along the
torque/slip curve, until it finds a location where point
0 is higher than points l and u. The starting point is
estimated from the formula for breakdown slip,
where r
1
and x
1
represent the Thevenin-equivalent source
impedance given by (R
1
+ jX
1
)in parallel with jX
m
. [7]
The points l and u are equidistant in slip from point 0,
at s
0
* and s
0
+ *, where * is determined by dslip.
The apex of the parabola is at s ' a in Fig. 52, and the
breakdown slip is taken as sBrk ' a. The breakdown
torque is calculated by another function evaluation at
this slip, and not from the parabola itself.
If * is made small, the precision will improve but the
computation time will increase. (See dslip below).
The final points l, u and 0 in Fig. 52 define a tolerance
band TBand which is used in the Search algorithm.
Search The torque/slip curve is searched for its maximum by
means of a hill-climbing algorithm. It is preceded by an
initial calculation using the Fit algorithm, so the
intent is to improve on that initial calculation,
especially if the Fit algorithm has been set for a quick
result using a larger value of dslip (e.g., 0@02).
Starting from point 0 in Fig. 52, the slip step * is
reduced in stages. At each stage, points l and u are
recalculated. When either l or u rises above 0, 0 is
moved to that point and the process repeats with the next
smaller value of *. The search stops when two successive
changes in T
0
differ by less than TBand TOL, where TOL
(tolerance) is determined by TBrkTol, and TBand (Fig. 52)
is determined by the Fit algorithm.
For split-phase motors, the breakdown calculation is done with the run
capacitor, not the start capacitor.
To calculate the breakdown point in the generating region (negative
slip), set dslip to a negative value e.g., 0@01.
The breakdown point can be checked by inspecting the torque/speed curve.
A more precise check is to run a Steady-state Analysis with rpm =
rpmBrk, and to check that TorqSh = TBrk. Note that the special
adjustment factors XXL1b, XXL2b, XErbb are used only in the breakdown
calculation so they must be made consistent with XXL1, XXL2, XErb to get
an exact match. Also the check should be performed with TempCalc = Fixed
and with T_wdg_B and T_rtr_B consistent with T_wdg and T_rtr. If
Connex = SplitPh, T_aux must also be equal to T_wdg_B.
Fig. 51 Determining breakdown with SBrkType = Fit. The "gauge" l0u is moved backwards
and forwards until it straddles the breakdown point. Then a parabola is fitted
to the three points. Locations A,C,D are shown for completeness; clearly only
location B is acceptable for fitting the parabola.
dslip determines the spacing * between the three "gauge" points used in
fitting a parabola around the breakdown point. If dslip ' 0, * is set
to 0@02 s
0
, with s
0
estimated from eqn. (15); otherwise, the input
value of dslip is used directly. The default value works well with
typical motors, but in extreme cases of flat or peaky torque/speed
curves the fitted parabola may be less reliable and a larger or smaller
value may improve the calculation. Generally speaking, a larger value
(e.g. 0@1) will shorten the calculation time, but a smaller value will
improve the precision.
If sBrkType = Search, dslip provides the initial value of * in the
search algorithm.
If dslip < 0, the breakdown will be calculated in the generating regime
with negative slip. {0}
TBrkTol The tolerance used in the search for breakdown torque, expressed as TOL.
TBrkTol is used only when sBrkType = Search. If TBrkTol ' 0, TOL ' 0@01
or 1%. This is quite a tight tolerance considering that it is used
together with TBand, which is normally already very small: see Fig. 52.
If TBrkTol > 0, TOL ' 0@01 TBrkTol. A value of TBrkTol ' 0.0001
therefore results in a tolerance of 10
6
, which implies extreme precision
(but at the expense of longer computation time). The search is
terminated and deemed successful if the slip step * falls below 10
8
, but
if sBrk falls outside the "fit band" (l0u in Fig. 52), a warning message
will be displayed. The search fails if the slip step falls below 10
9
or if the number of steps exceeds 1000. {0}
Magnetic Circuit Adjustment Factors
qC_S Adjustment factor for Carter factor for stator slotting. See page 124.
For open (rectangular) slots, use qC_S = 0. For semiclosed slots,
closed slots, or slots with slot wedges, use qC_S = 1. Other values can
be used for fine adjustment. {0 or 1}
qC_R Adjustment factor for Carter factor for rotor slotting. See page 124.
For open (rectangular) slots, use qC_R = 0. For semiclosed slots,
closed slots, or slots with slot wedges, use qC_R = 1. Other values can
be used for fine adjustment. {0 or 1}
XkC Adjustment factor for the overall Carter coefficient, i.e., the product
kC_s kC_r. See kC on p. 124. Unlike qC_S and qC_R, XkC has no physical
basis, and is little more than a brazen fudge factor. {1}
XPCslot Adjustment factor for stator slot permeance coefficient PCSlot. It is
shown in SEM-3 that PC-IMD tends to underestimate PCSlot by a few
percent, because it assumes that the slot-leakage flux crosses the slot
in straight-line paths, in accordance with the classical theory.
Finite-element analysis suggests that the slot-leakage flux takes
curved paths with a higher permeance, so it may be desirable to use a
value such as 1@1, increasing the stator leakage reactance X1 very
slightly. {1}
XPRslot Adjustment factor for rotor slot permeance coefficient PRSlot. The same
factors discussed for XPCslot also apply to XPRslot, except that XPRslot
affects X2. {1}
INLX1 In the calculation of no-load current INL, there is no current in the
rotor. A finite-element flux-plot of this condition will show very
little stator slot-leakage flux. On this basis it can be argued that
X1 should be omitted from the equivalent circuit during the no-load
calculation (TorqCalc = NL, or LR+NL, etc). This is achieved by setting
INLX1 = false. There is some evidence (based on test data) to indicate
that this improves the accuracy of INL. Another argument in support of
this hypothesis is that the slot-leakage reactances are more significant
when the rotor current is flowing, because it generally has a component
that tends to shield the rotor, forcing some of the flux into the
leakage paths (including the zig-zag path). Obviously this effect
increases as the slip increases. The difference in magnetic boundary
conditions at the rotor and stator surfaces between no-load and on-load
conditions has been noted by one or two authors [3], but there appears
to be little analysis of it in the literature. The default value {true}
is perhaps the conventional choice; but users should not be afraid to
try {false}. {true}
XBst Adjustment factor for stator tooth flux-density. In the magnetic
circuit calculation, the width of the stator tooth is multiplied by the
factor 1/XBst. This should not be used as a fudge-factor, but to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the tooth.
XBrt Adjustment factor for rotor tooth flux-density. In the magnetic circuit
calculation, the width of the rotor tooth is multiplied by the factor
1/XBrt. This should not be used as a fudge-factor, but to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the tooth.
XBsy Adjustment factor for stator yoke flux-density. In the magnetic circuit
calculation, the width of the stator yoke is multiplied by the factor
1/XBsy. This should not be used as a fudge-factor, but to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the yoke.
XBry Adjustment factor for rotor yoke flux-density. In the magnetic circuit
calculation, the width of the rotor yoke is multiplied by the factor
1/XBry. This should not be used as a fudge-factor, but to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the yoke.
Fig. 52 Calculation of stator tooth length
XLst Adjustment factor for the effective magnetic length of the stator tooth
in the magnetic equivalent circuit, (Lst). This should be used to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the tooth, if necessary.
If XLst 0, Lst is computed along the main tooth section as shown in
Fig. 53, and no adjustment is possible. If XLst > 0, Lst is computed
as ASD XLst, where ASD is the actual slot-depth. []{1}
XLrt Adjustment factor for the effective magnetic length of the rotor tooth
in the magnetic equivalent circuit. Because the rotor tooth is divided
into sections in the magnetic equivalent circuit, there is in fact no
single parameter for the magnetic length of the rotor tooth, and so XLrt
is used to modify the mmf drop over the whole tooth. []{1}
XLys Adjustment factor for stator yoke length. This should be used to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the yoke, if necessary. []{1}
XLyr Adjustment factor for rotor yoke length. This should be used to make
reasonable allowances for the shape of the yoke, if necessary. []{1}
XBsh Adjustment factor for shaft flux-density Bshm. This is really a fudge-
factor, because the flux-density in the shaft is not a single value but
varies across the shaft. Moreover, it is extremely difficult to
calculate other than by finite-element analysis. Analytical programs
like PC-IMD are relieved to some extent by the fact that the shaft flux
usually is not very significant except in 2-pole motors or motors with
very narrow rotor yokes. For 2-pole motors PC-IMD has a special
nonlinear method IncShaft ' Comp. BH. In cases where the shaft flux is
likely to be important, finite-element analysis with PC-FEA is advised
as a check on the PC-IMD calculations. []{1}

"Revert" Parameters
"Revert" parameters cause the calculation to revert to a previous version.
RvtTap Reverts to calculations in versions compiled before 24-Oct-08.
If Connex = SplitPh, Calc1ph = XField, and TapType = Base, G-tap, or T-
Conn, the iron losses were being multiplied by 2. If RvtTap = false,
this error is corrected.
If Connex = SplitPh, Calc1ph = XField, and TapType = Base or G-tap,
there was an error in the segregation of iron loss between the main and
auxiliary axes (G/a was being used instead of G/a
2
; see SEM-3), and
consequently an error in the iron-loss calculation. Setting RvtTap =
false removes this problem.
Again if Connex = SplitPh, Calc1ph = XField, and TapType = Base or G-
tap, there was a small discontinuity in the shaft torque when Tap was
changed from zero to a very small value (such as 10
6
). Setting RvtTap
= false removes this problem, by reformulating the iron loss model so
that only one iron-loss conductance is used in the main winding axis
instead of two. The revised model is described in SEM-3.
If Connex = SplitPh, Calc1ph = XField, and TapType = None, the iron
losses remained fixed and equal to WFeBal, the value obtained with
balanced two-phase operation. If RvtTap = false, the iron losses vary
with the operating condition (for example, they are affected by the
capacitor value C_run).
RvtWSCan Reverts to calculations in versions compiled before 24-Oct-08.
RVTWSCan applies only when the motor has a stator can. It controls the
way in which the can loss is included in the overall power balance
(including the equivalent circuit).
If CanStyle = Stator or Both, the stator can loss WSCan was rendered as
a torque loss. This is maintained if RvtWSCan = TRUE. It is incorrect
in PC-IMD (although it is justifiable in PC-BDC). It can cause a dip
in the torque/speed curve at low speed. If RvtWSCan = false, WSCan is
treated as an electrical loss in parallel with the core loss, so it has
an effect on the core-loss resistance Rc in the equivalent circuit. It
is carried through into the solver procedures in Imst_1ph, Imst1HX,
TapCap and TapCapHx by the parameters WFeSCan and/or GWFeSCan (.."G"
being a core-loss conductance as described in SEM-3). {false}
Rvt_GB15 Reverts the geometry of Rotor Bar 1 and Bar 5 to an earlier version that
was slightly incorrect; see Fig. ? on p. ?. The correction appears
first in Version 4.1.1.78. {false}
Equivalent Circuit Adjustment Factors
When PC-IMD is set up with the most appropriate methods and settings, the next 12
parameters should ideally appear in Ted as a "sea of unity". Adjustments should be
made only when there is a good argument for them.
XXm Adjustment factor for magnetizing reactance.
XXskew Adjustment factor for X1skew and X2skew when DiffLeak = CGV; or for the
skew-leakage component of Xzz when DiffLeak = Alger.
XR1 Adjustment factor for primary resistance R1 (stator phase resistance).
XR1 is applied after the calculation of conductor length and should not
be confused with XET. By setting XR1 = 0 and XFe = 0 the results
obtained with No-Load calculation are comparable with those provided
by a magnetostatic FEA, where losses are not modelled. XR1 > 1 can be
used to compare PC-IMDs results with no-load test data, if the non-zero
friction and windage losses Wwf and stray load losses WSLL are modelled
as increased copper losses WCuS.
XXL1 Adjustment factor for stator leakage reactance. This can be set, for
example, using the results of locked-rotor measurements or finite-
element simulations.
XXL1s The value of stator leakage reactance adjustment factor used at stall
(locked-rotor), if TorqCalc includes "LR". See also T_wdg_S and
T_rtr_S. {1}
XXL1b The value of stator leakage reactance adjustment factor used in the
breakdown calculation if TorqCalc includes "Brk". See also T_wdg_B and
T_rtr_B. {1}
XXL2 Adjustment factor for rotor leakage reactance.
XXL2s The value of rotor leakage reactance adjustment factor used at stall,
if TorqCalc includes "LR". See also T_wdg_S and T_rtr_S. {1}
XXL2b The value of rotor leakage reactance adjustment factor used in the
breakdown calculation, if TorqCalc includes "Brk". See also T_wdg_B and
T_rtr_B. {1}
XErb [Only for Bar1(2) = Type0 or C-Custom, i.e. closed rotor slots; or with
open rotor slots when muPlug = 0. Effective only when LkSat = None].
Adjustment factor for secondary EMF generated by rotor iron bridge flux.
See also LkSat, X2Aug and Erb.
For closed rotor slots when EQcct = SPEED the EMF Erb is added to the
equivalent circuit to represent the flux through the rotor slot bridges.
These saturable bridges cannot be modelled by a fixed permeance. PC-IMD
assumes a sine-distributed component of the airgap flux that enters the
rotor radially and then travels circumferentially around the rotor, via
the bridges. At a position 90Eelec from the point of peak airgap flux-
density, the bridge flux density will be a maximum, which is assumed to
be 2.1T. When this is multiplied by the cross-section area of the
bridge, R_Bridge Lstk, the resulting flux is a component of the
fundamental flux in parallel with (and in phase with) the leakage flux
through X2. To see the effect of Erb, vary the rotor bridge thickness
R_Bridge (even making it zero).
XErbs The value of XErb used at stall, if TorqCalc includes "LR". {1}
XErbb The value of XErb used at breakdown, if TorqCalc includes "Brk". {1}
Brazen fudge factors
Harmonic torque adjustment parameters
The individual harmonic torques computed in the Alger equivalent circuit can be
separately adjusted by
XTh5 Harmonic torque adjustment for 5th space harmonic. {1}
XThmm Harmonic torque adjustment for mmth space harmonic. {1}
XThmn Harmonic torque adjustment for nnth space harmonic. {1}
XThpm Harmonic torque adjustment for pmth space harmonic. {1}
XThpn Harmonic torque adjustment for pnth space harmonic. {1}
XTLR Multiplies the locked-rotor torque TLR. This is the worst kind of
fudge-factor, because there is no physical argument behind it, and it
isolates the affected parameter TLR from the algorithm used to calculate
it. If TLR is inaccurate, the reason will be inaccuracy in the current
ILR and the locked-rotor power factor PFLR, or the rotor impedance R2
at zero slip. R2 is affected by deep-bar effect; and the leakage
reactances are affected by saturation, and although PC-IMD calculates
these effects, they are often subject to uncertainty. The rotor
temperature can also affect ILR and TLR. {1}
XTbrk Adjustment factor for breakdown torque. All the comments about XTLR
also apply to this one. {1}
PC-IMD 9.04 Output parameters (design sheet) Page 113
3.3 Output parameters (design sheet)
Input parameters already described in 3.1-3.2 are not repeated here. Some
parameters listed here may not appear in the design sheet, but are available via the
calculator [F4]. On the computer screen, output and input parameters are in
different colours. If the design sheet is printed in PostScript or RTF format, the
values of the output parameters are printed in boldface and the values of the input
parameters in italics. In the following, the values of output parameters are printed
in boldface. For dimensions, see the reference diagrams.
The design sheet excerpts reproduced in this section do not refer to any particular
motor and are not intended to be consistent with one another.
PC-IMD 4.1 (4.1.0.0) 11-Apr-2008 14:23:39
SPEED Laboratory
d:\test\example5.im1
PC-IMD main title
PC-IMD sub-title
This contains the program version number, the date and time, the data filename, the
licensee and the user-defined title and sub-title.
Page 114 Output parameters (design sheet) PC-IMD 9.04
1 Dimensions : -----------------------------------------------------------------

Slots 36 Poles 4 Lstk 154.2059 mm
StatorOD 192.8858 mm RotorOD 128.5049 mm Gap 0.5000 mm
StatorID 129.5049 mm RotorID 45.8782 mm MConfig Int

STATOR..
Rad3 96.4429 mm R1g 64.7524 mm
S-slot Round ASlot 85.6754 mm^2 ASlotLL 70.5712 mm^2
SD_S 15.5952 mm SO_S 2.5738 mm TW_S 6.4185 mm
TGD_S 1.0000 mm TGANG_S 20.0000 mDeg SOAng 32.5000 mDeg
STOH 1.2185 mm SBWid 6.9523 mm SYoke 16.0952 mm
NSDuct 0 WSDuct 0.5000 mm LFeS 149.5797 mm

ROTOR..
Rad1 64.2524 mm Rad0 0.0000 mm RadSh 22.9391 mm
Bar1 Type5 R_Bars 32 DblCage false
Skew 0.0000 SSlots LB 154.2059 mm BarExt 0.0000 mm
ARslot 69.6400 mm^2 Abar 69.6400 mm^2 Shrink 0.0000
muPlug 1.0000 SBFull true RYoke 25.3228 mm
Rotor slot dimensions..
SD_R 15.2956 mm SO_R 1.3593 mm TW_R 6.1184 mm
SetBack 0.6949 mm
Dbar 112.5144 mm

Rotor end-rings and fins..
ERType1 Type A
ERType2 Type A
ERLedge1 0.0000 mm ERthk1 10.0000 mm ERID1 96.5239 mm
ERLedge2 0.0000 mm ERthk2 10.0000 mm ERID2 96.5239 mm
ERArea1 152.9561 mm^2 ERArea2 152.9561 mm^2 EROD 127.1151 mm
NRDuct 0 WRDuct 0.0000 mm
ROH 0.0000 mm LFeR 149.5797 mm

Shaft..
RadSh 22.9391 mm RadSh2 15.0000 mm RadSh3 15.0000 mm
AxExSh1 25.0000 mm AxExSh2 60.0000 mm AxExSh3 45.0000 mm

Stacking factors..
Stf 0.9700 XStf_R 1.0000
With double-cage rotors, some parameter names may appear twice, e.g. "SetBack", but
Cage 1 data always precedes Cage 2 data.
StatorOD Stator outer diameter, i.e. (= 2 Rad3).
RotorOD Rotor outer diameter, i.e. (= 2 Rad1).
R1g The radius of the slotted stator surface. In interior-rotor motors,
this is half the stator bore, Rad1 + Gap. In exterior-rotor motors, it
is Rad1 Gap.
ASlot The gross punched area of the stator slot, minus the slot-opening area;
see Fig. 97.
ASlotLL See page 118.
STOH Stator tooth overhang.
SBWid Stator slot-bottom width.
SYoke Depth of stator yoke, measured from the slot bottom to Rad3.
LFeS Axial length of iron in stator : (Lstk NSDuct WSDuct) Stf.
LB Skewed length of rotor bar at the mean bar diameter Dbar.
ARslot The gross punched area of the rotor slot. See Fig. 73.
Abar Cross-section of rotor bar, equal to (1 ! Shrink) the winding area of
the rotor slot. If SBFull = true, the winding area is equal to the gross
punched area ARslot. If SBFull = false, it is equal to ARslot minus the
setback area. See SBFull and Fig. 73.
RYoke Radial depth of rotor yoke, measured from the slot bottom to RadSh.
DBar Mean diameter of rotor cage.
LFeR Axial length of iron in rotor : (Lstk + 2 ROH NRDuct WRDuct) Stf
XStf_R.
End-ring parameters
EROD For Type A, Type B or Type C end-rings (Fig. 75), this is the outside
diameter of end-rings. It is the same at both ends, and is equal to the
diameter enveloping the rotor bars. See Fig. 74. For Type D end-rings,
EROD remains equal to the diameter enveloping the rotor bars, while the
two end-rings may have separate outside diameters specified via ERODia1
and ERODia2. See also EROD1 and EROD2.
EROD1 Outside diameter of end-ring 1 at left-hand end in outline editor axial
view.
EROD2 Outside diameter of end-ring 2 at right-hand end in outline editor axial
view.
ERID1 Inside diameter of end-ring 1 at left-hand end.
ERID2 Inside diameter of end-ring 2 at right-hand end.
ERArea1 Cross-section area of end-ring 1 at left-hand end in outline editor
axial view.
ERArea2 Cross-section area of end-ring 2 at right-hand end in outline editor
axial view.
Frame parameters
FSArea Frame surface area, including the cylindrical surface area of radius
Rad3 + FrThk plus the disk area of both end-caps.
FFArea Finned area of frame surface. Equal to FSArea if there are no fins.
2 Winding Data : ---------------------------------------------------------------

General
Connex 3-Ph Delt
PC 100.0000 %Cu TCC 0.3930 %/DegC WireDens 8890.0000 kg/m3
SFill 0.5683 SFillHBL 0.8784 ACu 48.6877 mm^2
MaxSFg 0.5683 MaxSFn 0.8784 ASlotLL 70.5712 mm^2
ACL 5425.9889 mm^2 LCL 35.1867 mm Liner 0.4000 mm
PCSlot 1.4840 XPCslot 1.0000
EndFill 0.5000 LaxPack 248.8549 mm LAYERS 2.0000
Ax1md 65.0000 mDeg Ax2md 125.0000 mDeg Ax3md 185.0000 mDeg

Stator winding..
WdgType ConcEqual T_wdg 75.0000 DegC RLL_Amb 1.1835 ohm
Throw 11 CPP 3.0000 TC 17
Tph 204.0000 PPaths 1 Tph1 195.7982
MLT 670.1595 mm XET 1.0000 Ext 0.0000 mm
Wire_1 BareDia
WDia_1 1.3503
NSH_1 1 EWG 13.5028
BWDia_1 1.3503 mm EWDia 1.3503 mm
BWArea_1 1.4320 mm^2 ACond 1.4320 mm^2
InsThk_1 0.0000 mm
HBWDia_1 1.3503 mm

Winding factors..
kw1 0.9598 kw3 -0.6667 kw5 0.2176
kw7 0.1774 kw9 -0.3333 kw11 0.1774
kw13 0.2176 kw15 -0.6667 kw17 0.9598
kw19 -0.9598 kw21 0.6667 kw23 -0.2176
ks1 1.0000 kr_RS 14376.3501 zSlot 34

Rotor cage
CgDens 2700.0000 kg/m3 ERDens 2700.0000 kg/m3 SBFull true
PC1 50.0000 %Cu TCC1 0.3750 %/DegC RhoBar 4.3900E-08 ohm-m
PCEndR 50.0000 %Cu TCCEndR 0.3750 %/DegC RhoEndR 4.3900E-08 ohm-m
Kring1 0.9560 Kring2 0.9560
PRSlot 1.5440 XPRslot 1.0000
General
SFill Calculated gross slot-fill. (Total copper area per slot/ASlot).
SFillHBL Calculated net slot fill. (No. of strands/slot d
2
of each strand,
divided by the area ASlotLL and averaged over all slots. See p. 57.
ACu Average copper area per slot.
MainACu Average copper area of main winding per slot in split-phase motor.
AuxACu Average copper area of aux. winding per slot in split-phase motor.
MaxSFg The largest "gross" slot-fill factor in any slot, using the definition
copper area/ASlot.
MaxSFn The largest "net" slot-fill factor in any slot, using the definition
nd
2
/ASlotLL where n = strands/slot and d = strand diameter.
ASlotLL (lit. ASlot Less Liner). Cross-sectional area of one stator slot, less
liner and top wedge area. If Liner = 0 and TwjThk = 0 and TopStick =
false, this is the same as ASlot. If TopStick = true, ASlotLL is
depleted by the topstick area ATStick and the top wedge area, Fig. 97.
ASlotLL is used in calculating slot-fill factor SFillHBL by the "square
wire" method. Since AslotLL is common for all slots, it is not depleted
by the phase separator area; see MaxSFHBL. See page 57.
ACL Contact area of one slot liner against the inside wall of the stator
slot. If TopStick = true, this is depleted by twice the area of one
sloping side of the stator slot wedge. See Fig. 97. ACL is used in
the calculation of the thermal resistance across the slot liner.
LCL Contact length of one slot liner against the inside wall of the stator
slot. If TopStick = true, this is depleted by twice the length of one
sloping side of the stator slot wedge. See Fig. 97.
PCSlot The stator slot permeance coefficient.
LaxPack Axial "length over ends" after compaction of end-windings by the volume
ratio EndFill. See Fig. 76.
LAYERS Number of layers (coil-sides per slot) required in winding, calculated
as the total number of coils multiplied by 2/Slots. Non-integer values
are possible.
Ax1md Orientation of axis of phase 1, measured CCW from the centre-line of
slot 0 (i.e., the x-axis in the outline editor). In 3-phase machines the
phase winding axes are displaced by 120Eelec; in split-phase motors the
auxiliary winding is 90Eelec ahead of the main winding. [Emech]
Ax2md Orientation of axis of phase 2.
Ax3md Orientation of axis of phase 3.
Stator winding
RLL_Amb Line-line resistance at the ambient temperature Ambient.
Tph Turns in series per phase. For standard windings this is computed as
Tph = CPP Poles TC / PPATHS
For Custom windings, Tph is calculated from the coil list, which is
defined with the winding editor. The total number of conductors/phase
is 2 Tph PPaths.
Tph_Aux "Tph" for auxiliary winding of a split-phase motor.
Tph1 Effective turns in series per phase, i.e. kw1 Tph. "Effective" means
"effective in producing a fundamental sinusoidal MMF distribution".
Tph1Aux "Tph1" for auxiliary winding of a split-phase motor.
MLT Mean length of turn. Includes adjustment to end-turn length via XET.
MLT_Aux "MLT" for auxiliary winding of a split-phase motor.
EWG Effective wire gauge : i.e., the gauge of a single strand that has the
same cross-section area as the combined cross-section area of all the
strands in a multi-strand conductor.
EWDia Diameter of a single strand of wire of gauge EWG.
BWDia_1 Bare diameter of Wire m1. See Fig. 99 on page 168. The result depends
on Wire_1 : see page 56.
HBWDia_1 Diameter of Wire m1 measured over "heavy-build" insulation. For
circular wire this is BWDia_1 + 2 InsThk_1; for rectangular wire it
is 4/B /(wa_1 + 2 InsThk_1) (wb_1 + 2 InsThk_1)].
BWArea_1 Cross-section area of Wire m1; (conductor only; does not include
insulation).
oInsThk1 Output value of insulation thickness on one strand of Wire m1. If
Wire_1 = AWGTable or AWGFrac and the input value of InsThk_1 = 0, this
is determined from AWG tables or user-supplied custom wire tables.
Otherwise it is the same as the input value, InsThk_1.
BWDia_2 Bare diameter of Wire m2.
HBWDia_2 Diameter of Wire m2 measured over "heavy-build" insulation.
BWArea_2 Cross-section are of Wire m2.
oInsThk2 Output value of insulation thickness on one strand of Wire m2. If
Wire_2 = AWGTable or AWGFrac and the input value of InsThk_2 = 0, this
Otherwise it is the same as the input value, InsThk_2.
BWDia_A Bare diameter of Wire mA (i.e., in the auxiliary winding of a split-
phase motor).
HBWDia_A Diameter of Wire mA measured over "heavy-build" insulation.
BWArea_A Cross-section are of Wire mA.
oInsThkA Output value of insulation thickness on one strand of Wire mA. If
Wire_A = AWGTable or AWGFrac and the input value of InsThk_A = 0, this
Otherwise it is the same as the input value, InsThk_A.
ACond The cross-section area of one conductor (not including wire insulation).
A conductor carries the phase current divided by PPaths, and is made up
of NSH_1 strands of Wire m1 and NSH_2 strands of Wire m2. See Fig. 99
on page 168. If Connex ' SplitPh, ACond refers to the main winding.
ACondHB Cross-section area of one conductor including wire insulation.
AuxACond The cross-section area of one conductor of the auxiliary winding of a
split-phase motor.
AuxACHB "ACond" of auxiliary winding of a split-phase motor.
ATR Actual auxiliary/mains turns ratio in a split-phase motor, i.e.
Tph_Aux/Tph.
ETR Effective auxiliary/main turns ratio in a split-phase motor, i.e.
Tph1_Aux/Tph1
CRatio Ratio of total copper cross-section in the stator to the total cross-
section of all the rotor bars.
13
It is not included in the Winding editor even if EQcct = Alger.
Winding factors
kw1..kw23 Harmonic winding factors for stator winding. Skew is included in the
winding factor only if EQcct = Alger.
13
If EQcct = SPEED, Richter's
approach is used: the winding factors are dependent only on the stator
winding layout (skew harmonic factors are not included in kw1...kw23)
and only the fundamental skew factor affects the magnetizing reactance,
the rotor resistance and leakage reactance. The method used to compute
the harmonic winding factors depends on WdgType.
kw1_aux "kw1" of auxiliary winding of a split-phase motor.
ks1 Fundamental skew factor.
kr_RS The ratio that refers rotor impedance to the stator circuit and the line
frequency. It can be thought of as the square of the "effective turns
ratio":
kr_RS = 4 Nphases/R-Bars (Tph kw1/ks1)
2
The 4 in front of this equation is explained by the fact that for the
rotor cage the effective turns per phase, i.e. the product between the
number of turns per phase and the fundamental harmonic factor, is equal
to 1/2.
zslot Average no. of conductors per slot, calculated as Tph 2
Nphases/Slots.
Rotor cage parameters
This data appears for cage-type rotors. For wound-rotor machines, see p. ?.
RhoBar The resistivity of the rotor bar at the temperature T_r, calculated via
PC1 and TCC1. If the bar has three different conductivities, RhoBarN
and RhoBar2 are also displayed. See Fig. 102
RhoEndR The resistivity of the rotor end-ring at the temperature T_r, (or
appropriate end-ring temperature in the Hot16 thermal model).
Kring1,2 Trickeys correction factor for end-ring resistance, to account for the
distribution of current in the radial direction. PC-IMD uses the formula
given by Veinott [5].
PRslot The permeance coefficient for the rotor slot.
Rotor winding..
RWdgType ModWave
Wire_B Rect wa_B 11.0000 mm wb_B 15.0000 mm
Throw_R 15 RSlots TC_R 1
Liner_R 0.0000 mm CInsThkR 0.0000 mm InsThk_R 0.0000 mm
SFn_R 0.8539 SFg_R 0.6141
ARslotLL 386.4600 mm^2 ARslot 537.4104 mm^2 ACond_R 165.0000 mm^2
RConnex Delta PPaths_R 2 XET_R 1.0000
CWR 0.0000 mm COHR 0.0000 mm BarExt 17.3000 mm
MLT_R 2053.9743 mm RLL20_R 7.1536E-04 ohm RCoil20R 2.1461E-04 ohm
kw1R 0.9567 Tph_R 10.0000 Rph_R 0.0011 ohm
CoilPh_R 10.0000 RphR_eqY 3.5768E-04 ohm RphRXeqY 3.5768E-04 ohm
PRSlot 1.0345 XPRslot 1.0000 ACond_R 165.0000 mm^2
RXR 0.0000 ohm RX_eqY 0.0000 ohm RXL 0.0000 mH
Rotor winding parameters
This data appears for wound rotors; i.e., when MConfig = WR.
SFn_R Net slot-fill factor, defined as nA/ARslotLL, where n is the number of
strands per slot, and A is the cross-section area of one strand,
including the strand insulation of thickness InsThk_R. With round wire
of bare diameter d, A = B/4 (d + 2 InsThk_R)
2
. With rectangular
wire of sides a and b, A = (a + 2 InsThk_R) (b + 2 InsThk_R).
SFg_R Gross slot-fill factor, that is, the ratio of copper cross-section area
to slot area ARslot.
ARslotLL Wound-rotor machines in PC-IMD are currently restricted to rotor slots
of Type2 (Bar1 = Type2). Then ARslotLL is calculated as the available
winding area BarDpth BarWdth, less the slot-liner cross-section area
2 (BarDpth + BarWdth) Liner.
ARslot Rotor slot area. As with Aslot in the stator, ARslot does not include
the approximately rectangular area at the slot-opening.
ACond_R Cross-section of one rotor conductor. A conductor carries the rotor
phase current divided by the number of parallel paths PPaths_R.
MLT_R Mean length of turn in one rotor coil. See p. 64.
RLL20_R Line-line resistance of rotor circuit at 20EC. [ohm]
RCoil20R Resistance of one rotor coil at 20EC. [ohm]
kw1R Fundamental harmonic winding factor of rotor winding.
Tph_R Turns in series per phase in rotor winding.
Rph_R Resistance per phase of rotor winding at the operating temperature T_r.
[ohm]
RphR_eqY Resistance per phase of "equivalent wye" connection of rotor winding.
If RConnex = 3-ph Wye, RphR_eqY = Rph_R. If RConnex = 3-ph Dlt, then
RphR_eqY = 1/3 Rph_R. [ohm]
RphRXeqY Resistance per phase of "equivalent wye" connection of entire rotor
resistance including internal and external resistances. [ohm]
RX_eqY Resistance per phase of "equivalent wye" connection of external rotor
resistance. [ohm]
CoilPh_R The number of rotor coils in series per phase.
CalcMode f/slip
rpmS 1500.0000 rpm rpm 1446.9541 rpm Slip 0.0354 p.u.
Freq 50.0000 Hz Vs 415.0000 V Drive AC_Volts
r_CBL 1.0000 ohm/km x_CBL 3.0000 ohm/km Lgth_CBL 10.0000 m
R_Cable 0.0300 ohm X_Cable 0.0900 ohm N_CBL 3
T_CBL 20.0000 DegC c_CBL 0.0000 uF/km
RCable20 0.0300 ohm RLL20 1.1173 ohm
The above parameters are always shown in this section but their type (input or
output) is determined by the value of CalcMode.
R_Cable Cable resistance per phase at the temperature T_CBL. If N_CBL = 3, this
is the resistance of just one wire; but if N_CBL = 6, it is the series
resistance of two wires, the "go" and "return". If Connex = 3ph Delt,
R_Cable is multiplied by 3 and added to the phase resistance for the
purpose of calculating the current and the terminal voltage Vt; [ohm]
X_Cable Cable reactance per phase at the frequency Freq. If N_CBL = 3, this is
the reactance of just one wire; but if N_CBL = 6, it is the series
reactance of two wires, the "go" and "return". [ohm]
Z0_Cable Surge impedance of cable, calculated from the inductance specified via
x_CBL and the cable capacitance c_CBL.
RCable20 Cable resistance per phase at 20EC.
RLL20 Line-to-line resistance of motor + cable at 20EC.
Additional parameters for split-phase motors
Auxiliary circuit
CutOut 75.000 % C_start 30.000 uF C_run 30.000 uF
StartRun Run R_start 0.000 Ohm R_run 0.000 Ohm
These are all input parameters except StartRun.
StartRun Tells whether C_start/R_start or C_run/R_run was connected at during the
single load-point calculation.
4 Magnetic design : -----------------------------------------------------------
SSteel Losil 800/65
RSteel Losil 800/65
ShSteel Losil 800/65
MagCalc Classical XBst 1.0000 XBrt 1.0000
XBsy 1.0000 XBry 1.0000 XBsh 1.0000
Stf 0.9700 XStf_R 1.0000 IncShaft false
PPitch 101.7128 mm Ag 1.562E+04 mm^2 Lge 0.5876 mm
kC_s 1.1306 kC_r 1.0394 kC 1.1752
muPlug 1.0000 PCplug 0.5112
Bstpk 1.5178 T ATst 8.2687 A MMFst 0.0210 p.u.
Brtpk 1.7889 T Atrt 24.8774 A MMFrt 0.0633 p.u.
Bsypk 1.6623 T ATsy 67.6359 A MMFsy 0.1721 p.u.
Brypk 1.1078 T ATry 3.7301 A MMFry 0.0095 p.u.
Bshpk 0.0000 T ATsh 0.0000 A MMFsh 0.0000 p.u.
Bg1L 0.8404 T ATgap 392.9940 A kXm 1.2659
Bgm 0.5350 T Bgpk 0.8404 T Phi1L 8.3920 mWb
SSteel Name of stator steel.
RSteel Name of rotor steel.
ShSteel Name of shaft steel.
PPitch Pole pitch, calculated at the stator bore.
Ag Pole area at the middle of the airgap. This is used only in the
calculation of belt/skew/zigzag reactance using DiffLeak = CGV. The main
magnetic circuit calculations use the pole area at the stator bore,
consistent with PPitch.
Lge Effective airgap length, i.e., kC_s kC_r Gap. For example, Lge
influences the magnetizing reactance (Xm, Xm0); the belt leakage; the
differential leakage inductance directly if DiffLeak = Richter or SPEED;
and the stray-load loss.
5
s
g
5
s
g

s
g
q
s
(16)
Fig. 53 Permeance of slot plug
kC_s Carter factor for stator slotting, approximated as
where s ' SO_S, the stator slot-opening; g is the physical airgap; and
is the slot-pitch. The parameter q ' qC_s expresses an adjustment
introduced by C.G. Veinott. For fully open slots qC_s should be 0, which
makes kC_s very close to Carters original formulation. For semi-closed
slots, Veinott uses the formula obtained with q ' 1, which makes the
effective magnetic airgap a few percent larger and tends to increase the
no-load current slightly. PC-IMD provides a further empirical adjustment
by allowing q to vary continuously between the extremes of 0 (open slot)
and 1 (semi-closed slot). However, values other than 0 or 1 should used
judiciously, 1 being appropriate in most cases. See SEM-3 and [5].
kC_r Carter factor for rotor slotting. Uses the same formula (16) as kC_s,
but with values of s, appropriate for the rotor and q ' qC_r. For
closed rotor slots kC_r = 1. For double-cage rotors, kC_r is the
average of the coefficients for the two cages.
kC_sd Carter factor for stator ducts. See WSDuct.
kC_rd Carter factor for rotor ducts. See WRDuct.
kC The product XkC kC_r kC_s kC_sd kC_rd.
PCplug The permeance coefficient of the rotor slot-opening into which the slot
wedge muPlug is inserted, muPlug h/w in Fig. 54.
Magnetic circuit flux densities
Bstpk Peak stator tooth flux-density.
Brtpk Peak rotor tooth flux-density.
Bsypk Peak stator yoke flux-density.
Brypk Peak rotor yoke flux-density.
Bshm Mean shaft flux-density.
MMF's expressed as a fraction of the airgap MMF
MMFst Stator tooth MMF, [p.u.].
MMFrt Rotor tooth MMF, [p.u.].
MMFsy Stator yoke MMF, [p.u.].
MMFry Rotor yoke MMF, [p.u.].
MMFsh Shaft MMF, [p.u.]. The "shaft permeance" is in parallel with the rotor
yoke permeance in the magnetic equivalent circuit and therefore MMFry
appears across both of them.
Ampere-turns
ATst Stator tooth MMF.
ATrt Rotor tooth MMF.
ATsy Stator yoke MMF.
ATry Rotor yoke MMF.
ATsh Shaft MMF. The "shaft permeance" is in parallel with the rotor yoke
permeance in the magnetic equivalent circuit and therefore ATry appears
across both of them.
ATgap Airgap MMF.
Airgap flux densities and flux
Bg1L Peak fundamental airgap flux-density under load.
Bgm Mean of airgap flux-density fundamental wave, i.e. Bg1L 2/.
Phi1L Fundamental flux/pole under load. It is related to the air-gap flux
density through the equation Phi1L = Bgm 2 R1g/Poles Lstk, where
R1g is the stator bore radius Rad1 + Gap.
kXm Magnetic circuit saturation factor, defined as the ratio between the
unsaturated and saturated magnetizing reactances, Xm0/Xm. Normally in
the range 12.
Note that if NonLin = false then all MMFs will be set to zero and the saturation
factor kXm = 1. In this case the values computed for the flux densities can be
treated only as a rough approximation.
Additional parameters available after a No-Load calculation
Bshm Mean value of flux density in the shaft.
Bgpk Peak value of air-gap flux density distribution including saturation
harmonics due to fundamental MMF.
kBg Air-gap flux density factor.
kfE1 EMF wave-form factor.
5 Equivalent circuit parameters : ---------------------------------------------
R1 47.4508 ohm X1 64.9286 ohm X1unsat 65.0474 ohm
R2 62.3088 ohm X2 66.2745 ohm X2unsat 56.7770 ohm
Rc 9772.6144 ohm Xm0 1175.7467 ohm Xm 1095.8282 ohm
Rbar 54.9635 ohm REndRing 7.3452 ohm Erb 0.0000 V
R_rotor 8.6050E-05 ohm X_rotor 9.1527E-05 ohm XErb 1.0000
K_r 1.0004 K_x 0.9999 Bar1 Type0
DeepBar Boldea EQcct SPEED EndLeak SPEED
DiffLeak CGV DiffSat FALSE
XXm 1.0000 XXL1 1.0000 XXL2 1.0000
LkSat Norman kXL1 0.9982 kXL2 1.1673
kzz 0.9980 kX1slot 0.9979 kX2slot 1.4614
X1slot 25.2060 ohm X1end 6.2306 ohm X1diff 33.6108 ohm
X1belt 5.2567 ohm X1zz 28.3541 ohm X1skew 0.0000 ohm
X2slot 20.7260 ohm X2end 2.4401 ohm X2diff 33.6108 ohm
X2belt 5.2567 ohm X2zz 28.3541 ohm X2skew 0.0000 ohm
Resistances
R1 Primary (stator) resistance/phase.
R2 Secondary (rotor) resistance/phase referred to the primary.
R22 [Only if DblCage = true]. Secondary resistance/phase of 2nd cage.
RBar Bar component of R2.
REndRing End-ring component of R2, i.e. RBar + REndRing = R2.
R_rotor Rotor cage resistance, not referred to stator, i.e. R2/kr_RS.
Rc Core loss resistance per phase. Rc and Xm are in parallel.
Reactances
Xm0 Unsaturated magnetizing reactance/phase.
Xm Saturated magnetizing reactance/phase after multiplying by the
adjustment factor XXm, i.e. XXm (kXm Xm0).
X1 The saturated value of the stator leakage reactance/phase.
X1unsat The unsaturated value of the stator leakage reactance/phase, i.e., the
sum of slot, end-winding, differential and skew components, X1slot +
X1end + X1diff + X1skew before any saturation factors are applied.
X1slot Slot leakage component of X1.
X1end End-turn component of X1. The end-turn length is adjusted with XET.
X1diff Differential leakage component of X1. If DiffLeak = CGV, X1diff = X1belt
+ X1zz. If DiffLeak = Alger, X1diff = X1zz with X1belt = 0, and X1zz
includes a skew-leakage term which can be adjusted using XXskew. (See
[3], eqn. (7.60)). According to Richter and SPEED methods, X1diff is
calculated directly from the harmonic analysis of the air-gap field. If
DiffLeak = User the output value equals the input value XDiff..
X1belt Belt leakage component of X1diff. Only if DiffLeak = CGV is the value
of X1belt non-zero; otherwise it is not displayed.
X1zz Zig-zag component of X1diff. If DiffLeak = Richter, SPEED or User then
X1zz = 0 and is not displayed. If DiffLeak = Alger the differential
leakage reactance is the same as the zig-zag leakage reactance.
X1skew Skew leakage component of X1. Only if DiffLeak = CGV is the value of
X1skew non-zero; otherwise it is not displayed. For the other methods
available through DiffLeak the effect of skew is included in the
differential leakage reactance.
X2 The saturated value of the rotor leakage reactance/phase. For closed
rotor slots when LkSat = None, X2 includes X2Aug, and in this case it
will be greater than X2unsat, which does not include X2Aug. In all other
cases X2 will generally be less than X2unsat.
X2unsat The unsaturated value of the rotor leakage reactance/phase referred to
the primary, i.e., the sum of slot, end-winding, differential and skew
components, X2slot + X2end + X2diff + X2skew before any saturation
factors are applied.
X22 [Only if DblCage = true]. Secondary leakage reactance/phase of 2nd cage.
X2Aug Secondary leakage reactance/phase augmented by a secondary leakage
reactance equivalent to Erb/I2, introduced to account for saturable
bridges of closed rotor slots. If the rotor bar is not Type0 or C-Custom
then X2 = X2Aug.
X_rotor Actual leakage reactance of rotor cage, un-referred to stator, i.e.
X_rotor = X2/kr_RS.
X2slot Slot leakage component of X2.
X2end End-ring component of X2.
X2diff Differential leakage component of X2. If DiffLeak = CGV, X2diff = X2belt
+ X2zz. If DiffLeak = Alger, X2diff = X2zz with X2belt = 0. According
to Richter and SPEED methods X2diff is calculated directly from the
harmonic analysis of the air-gap field. If DiffLeak = User the output
value equals the input value XDiff...
X2belt Belt leakage component of X2diff. If DiffLeak = CGV, X2belt = X1Belt;
otherwise it is zero and is not displayed.
X2zz Zig-zag component of X2diff. If DiffLeak = Richter, SPEED or User then
X1zz = 0 and is not displayed. If DiffLeak = Alger the differential
leakage reactance is the same as the zig-zag leakage reactance. If
DiffLeak = CGV then X2zz = X1zz.
X2skew Skew leakage component of X2. If DiffLeak = CGV, X2skew = X1skew; for
the other methods available through DiffLeak the effect of skew is
included in the differential leakage reactance.
kXL1 Ratio of saturated/unsaturated values of X1.
kXL2 Ratio of saturated/unsaturated values of X2.
kzz Saturation factor for differential leakage reactance calculated when
LkSat = Norman.
kX1slot Saturation factor for stator slot-leakage reactance.
kX2slot Saturation factor for rotor slot-leakage reactance.
RTC_OC Open-circuit rotor time-constant T
d0
= X
R
/R
2
/; Fig. 55. [sec]
RTC_SC Short-circuit rotor time-constant T
d
= X
R
/R
2
/; Fig. 55. [sec]
Fig. 54 Calculation of X
R
and X
R
for the open-circuit and short-circuit
transient rotor time-constants T
d0
and T
d
. Note the order of the
reactances X
1
and X
2
opposite from their normal placement in the
equivalent circuit. (See [10], pp. 121 and 420).
EMF
E1 RMS voltage across the magnetizing reactance. E1 is computed and updated
during the non-linear magnetic circuit iterations.
Erb EMF generated by rotor bridge flux in closed slot (Type0, C-Custom).
Erb2 [Only if DblCage = true] EMF generated by rotor bridge flux in closed
slot (Type0, C-Custom), for 2nd cage.
Deep-bar factors
The results obtained for these factors depend on the method specified by DeepBar.
K_r Deep-bar factor for rotor bar resistance.
K_r2 Deep-bar factor for rotor bar resistance of second cage.
K_x Deep-bar factor for slot-leakage component of rotor bar reactance.
K_x2 Deep-bar factor for slot leakage component of rotor bar reactance of
second cage.
Equivalent wye impedances
R1_eqY R1 if Connex ' 3-ph wye, R1/3 if Connex = 3-ph Delt, else 0. [ohm]
R2_eqY R2 if Connex ' 3-ph wye, R2/3 if Connex = 3-ph Delt, else 0. [ohm]
Rc_eqY Rc if Connex ' 3-ph wye, Rc/3 if Connex = 3-ph Delt, else 0. [ohm]
X1_eqY X1 if Connex ' 3-ph wye, X1/3 if Connex = 3-ph Delt, else 0. [ohm]
X2_eqY X2 if Connex ' 3-ph wye, X2/3 if Connex = 3-ph Delt, else 0. [ohm]
Xm_eqY Xm if Connex ' 3-ph wye, Xm/3 if Connex = 3-ph Delt, else 0. [ohm]
Additional parameters if EQcct = Alger
Xpm 2.003 Ohm X2m 13.231 Ohm R2m 3.426 Ohm
Xpn 1.792 Ohm X2n 6.336 Ohm R2n 3.426 Ohm
Xm5 0.210 Ohm X25 0.378 Ohm R25 0.102 Ohm
Xm7 0.071 Ohm X27 0.211 Ohm R27 0.068 Ohm
Xm11 0.029 Ohm X211 0.487 Ohm R211 0.096 Ohm
Xm13 0.031 Ohm X213 5.390 Ohm R213 0.144 Ohm
Xmm 0.353 Ohm X2m 13.231 Ohm R2m 3.426 Ohm
Xmn 0.283 Ohm X2n 6.336 Ohm R2n 3.426 Ohm
XmHx 4.772 Ohm
Xpm,X2m,R2m; Xpn, X2n, R2n Equivalent circuit parameters for backward and
forward slot-permeance harmonics.
Xm5,X25,R25; Xm7,X27,R27;
Xm11,X211,R211; Xm13,X213,R213 Equivalent circuit parameters for backward and
forward phase-belt harmonics.
Xmm,X2m,R2m; Xmn, X2n, R2n Equivalent circuit parameters for backward and
forward slot MMF harmonics.
XmHx Differential reactance as the sum of harmonic
magnetizing reactances.
L-circuit parameters
alpha_TL Effective turns ratio for transforming the conventional T-equivalent
circuit to the L-equivalent circuit. If uX1oX2 = 0, alpha_TL is
calculated from X1oX2; otherwise, it is calculated from the users
imposed value of this ratio, uX1oX2. See SEM-3.
X1oX2 Ratio of the saturated values of stator and rotor leakage reactances,
X1/X2. See also uX1oX2, and alpha_TL above.
XL_L Total leakage reactance in the L-circuit; see SEM-3. [ohm]
Rc_L Core-loss resistance in the L-circuit; see SEM-3. [ohm]
R2_L Rotor (referred) resistance in the L-circuit; see SEM-3. [ohm]
Xm_L Magnetizing reactance in the L-circuit; see SEM-3. [ohm]
Equivalent-circuit parameters for split-phase motors
AuxSpec T.Ratio ATR 1.2500 ETR 1.2500
R1aux 132.7735 ohm R2aux 64.8821 ohm
X1aux 22.2159 ohm X2Aux 24.1332 ohm Xaux_Int 0.6286
ZfR 167.3236 ohm ZbR 10.1788 ohm ZcR 0.0000 ohm
ZfX 203.7331 ohm ZbX 7.8602 ohm ZcX -795.7747 ohm
R1Aux Auxiliary winding resistance, referred to the main winding. If AuxSpec
= FullSpec, this is independent of R1.
X1aux Auxiliary winding leakage impedance. This is calculated in the same way
as X1, except that the slot-leakage permeance is influenced by AuxSP
which determines whether the auxiliary winding is laid in the tops of
the slots, or randomly interspersed with the main winding. The effect
of this is expressed as the ratio Xaux_Int, that is, the internally
calculated ratio between X1aux and X1, before X1aux is multiplied by a
2
to refer it to the main winding.
Forward and backward Impedances
The appearance of some of these parameters depends on the method of calculation as
determined by Calc1ph and TapType.
ZfR,ZfX Real and imaginary parts of forward impedance Z
f
.
ZbR,ZbX Real and imaginary parts of backward impedance Z
b
.
ZcR,ZcX Real and imaginary parts of external impedance in series with auxiliary
winding at start/run, i.e. R_start(run) ! j/C_start(run).
Note that if NonLin = false the output values for the magnetization branch
parameters are equal to the input values Rc = Rc.. and Xm = Xm.., while the
unsaturated magnetization reactance Xm0 is computed from geometry and winding data.
If DiffLeak = User the output values for the stator and rotor differential reactance
will be equal to the input value XDiff..
6 Performance : ---------------------------------------------------------------
OpMode Motoring
Vs 415.0000 V rpm 1447.5000 rpm Slip 0.0350
PShaft 6625.5163 W PElec 7684.0111 W Tshaft 43.7092 Nm
P.F. 0.8561 WTotal 1058.4948 W Effcy 86.2247 %
Currents..
Iph1 7.2091 A rms IL1 12.4865 A rms I2 6.0611 A
Imc 3.3981 A Imag 3.3902 A Ic 0.2312 A
Losses and related parameters..
WCuS 458.5418 W WCuR 243.5851 W WIron 265.8961 W
SLLCalc ANSIC50 WSLL 80.4719 W Wwf 10.0000 W
Jrms 7.5858 A/mm^2
JBar1 3.3558 A/mm^2 J_ER 3.9139 A/mm^2 JRotor 3.4706 A/mm^2
Other performance parameters..
PGap 6959.5732 W EMTorque 44.3060 Nm Tpls 0.0000 Nm
Power, torque, efficiency
OpMode Machine operating mode. Motoring means that electrical power is being
fed to the machine via the terminals and mechanical power is delivered
through the shaft, i.e. the shaft torque is positive and sufficient to
overcome the windage and friction torque. Generating means that the
mechanical power is being fed to the machine via the shaft and
electrical power is being delivered to the supply. Absorbing means that
mechanical power is being fed to the machine via the shaft, but the
generated airgap power is not sufficient to overcome the electrical and
magnetic losses. After a no-load calculation, OpMode = No-load.
Pshaft Shaft power. If CalcMode = f/PowerSh, this is equal (within limits of
computational tolerance), to input parameter PowrSh...
PshaftHP The shaft power in horsepower (1 h.p. ' 745@7 W). [h.p.]
PElec Electrical power at the machine terminals, i.e. PowerSh + WTotal.
Tshaft Shaft torque. If CalcMode = f/TorqSh, this is equal (within the limit
of the internal computational tolerance) to the value of the input
parameter TorqSh...
P.F. Power factor, calculated as the cosine of the phase angle between the
phase voltage and the phase current, assuming sinewaves.
WTotal Total loss, WCuS + WCuR + WIron + W_Brg + Wwf + WSLL + WCan + WShaft.
Effcy Machine efficiency. [%]
Eff_X_PF Product of efficiency and power factor. [%]
Voltages in the circuit diagram, Fig. 4 on p. 5. (Not displayed in the design sheet
but available in the Calculator [F4]):
VR1 Voltage across stator resistance R1. [V]
VX1 Voltage across stator leakage reactance X1. [V]
VR2 Voltage across rotor resistance R2. [V]
ER2 Voltage across rotor resistance R2(1/s 1). [V]
VX2 Voltage across rotor leakage reactance X2. [V]
Currents and current densities
Iph1 RMS phase current.
IL1 RMS line current.
I2 RMS secondary amps/phase, or "rotor current". For split-phase motors,
this is the value obtained during the balanced 2-phase calculation that
always precedes the split-phase calculation.
Imc "No-load" RMS amps/phase, i.e., the phasor sum of Imag + Ic; Fig. 4.
Imag Magnetizing RMS amps/phase.
Ic Core-loss current in core-loss resistance, RMS amps/phase.
Losses and related parameters
WCuS Stator I
2
R loss, calculated with the stator resistance R1 computed at
the temperature T_c.
WCuR Rotor I
2
R loss, calculated with the cage resistance R2 computed at the
temperature T_r.
WIron Iron loss (including both stator and rotor core loss). The result
depends on WFeCalc. Also note that WIron = XFe (WFeS + WFeR).
WSLL Stray load loss (not including WHx). The result depends on SLLCalc.
Wwf Windage and friction loss, evaluated at the actual rpm based on the
values of the input parameters Wf0, RPM0 and NWFT.
WHx Harmonic I
2
R loss in the rotor, calculated if EQcct = Alger and not
displayed if EQcct = SPEED. WHx is not included in WSLL.
WCan Total can loss; not displayed if there is no can.
WRCan Rotor can loss.
WSCan Stator can loss, calculated at the current airgap temperature T_g.
Current densities
Jrms RMS current density in stator copper.
JcmA Inverse current density in circular mils per ampere, calculated as
1973.525/Jrms; (displayed only if length units are inches).
JRotor RMS current density in rotor cage, computed as an average value based
on WCuR.
Jbar1 RMS current density in rotor bars. If DblCage = true, Jbar2 is displayed
for the second cage.
J_ER RMS current density averaged between the two rotor end-rings.
Other performance parameters
EMTorque Electromagnetic torque (airgap torque) corresponding to the airgap power
Pgap.
Pgap Airgap power (synchronous watts).
Tpls Amplitude of double-frequency pulsating torque.
Fig. 55 Block diagram of wound-rotor (doubly-fed) machine
Wound rotor : External circuit
The following parameters appear when MConfig = WR (wound-rotor).
E1R The voltage across the magnetizing branch referred to the rotor circuit,
that is, E1 * Slip//(kr_RS). [V]
E1Rd The real component of E1R. The reference phasor defining the d-axis or
real axis is the phase voltage Vph1, which is defined by the line-line
voltage Vs at the supply terminals. [V]
E1Rq The imaginary or q-axis component of E1R. [V]
ZXR The real component of the complex external impedance in the rotor
circuit, that is, R_RX kr_RS/|Slip|. [ohm]
ZXX The imaginary component of the complex external impedance in the rotor
circuit, that is, 2 Freq L_RX kr_RS. [ohm]
PXR The total power at the slip-rings. The complex power at the slip-rings
is computed as
PXR + j QXR = (Vrd + jVrq) /(kr_RS) I2*
per phase and I2 is the rotor current referred to the stator. For kr_RS
see p. 120. If PXR > 0, the power flows from the slip-rings to the
frequency converter and thence to the point of common coupling, (PCC in
Fig. 56). [W or kW]
QXR The total reactive power at the slip-rings. If QXR > 0, the reactive
power "flows" from the slip-rings to the frequency converter, meaning
that the frequency-converter is "absorbing VArs". [VAr or [kVAr]
PET The total power at the PCC, that is, Pelec ! PXR. Note that PET, PXR
and QXR as well as Pelec and Pshaft are all calculated and displayed for
the motoring convention, so they will generally change sign when the
machine is generating. [W or kW]
EffTotal The overall efficiency calculated from Pshaft and PET. [%]
Locked-rotor..
TLR 1.0924 Nm TLRpu 8.1734 sLR 1.0000
ILR 0.7809 A ILRpu 5.5339 PFLR 0.7909
PLR 256.7362 W
pTWdg 0.3335 C/sec pTBar 2.6756 C/sec
C_Cu 0.2553 kJ/C C_cage 0.0641 kJ/C
T_wdg_S 20.0000 DegC T_rtr_S 20.0000 DegC

Breakdown..
TBrk 1.0757 Nm TBrkpu 8.0482 sBrk 0.9700
IBrk 0.7726 A IBrkpu 5.4751 PFBrk 0.7966
T_wdg_B 20.0000 DegC T_rtr_B 20.0000 DegC

No-load..
TNL -0.0161 Nm TNLpu -0.1205 rpmNL 1500.0000 rpm
INL 0.1248 A INLpu 0.8845 PFNL 0.1014
T_wdg_NL 20.0000 DegC T_rtr_NL 20.0000 DegC rpmNL 1500.0000 rpm

If TorqCalc = LR+Brk+NL, LR+Brk, ... the following parameters are included in
various combinations.
TLR Locked-rotor torque.
PLR Locked rotor electrical power.
TLRpu Locked-rotor torque normalized to Tshaft.
sLR Locked-rotor slip.
ILR Locked-rotor current.
ILRpu Locked-rotor current normalized to IL1.
PFLR Locked-rotor power-factor.
pTWdg Adiabatic rate of rise of winding temperature at locked-rotor.
pTBar Adiabatic rate of rise of bar temperature at locked-rotor.
C_Cu Thermal capacitance of stator copper.
C_cage Thermal capacitance of rotor cage.
TBrk Breakdown torque.
TBrkpu Breakdown torque normalized to Tshaft.
sBrk Breakdown slip.
rpmBrk Breakdown speed in rpm.
PBrk Breakdown electrical power.
IBrk Breakdown current.
IBrkpu Breakdown current normalized to IL1.
PFBrk Breakdown power-factor.
TNL No-load torque at the speed specified by rpmNL.
PNL No-load electrical power.
TNLpu No-load torque normalized to TorqSh.
INL No-load current.
INLpu No-load current normalized to IL1.
PFNL No-load power factor.
Additional performance parameters of split-phase motors
Calc1ph = FBField
Im RMS current in main winding.
Ia RMS current in auxiliary winding.
Ifm Forward component of main winding current.
Ibm Backward component of main winding current.
Ic Core-loss current.
Vz1m Voltage across main winding leakage impedance.
Vaux Voltage across auxiliary winding.
E2m Induced voltage in main winding.
VZc Capacitor voltage.
VA_Zc Capacitor volt-amperes.
phVaux Phase angle of Vaux relative to supply voltage.
phVZc Phase angle of capacitor voltage relative to supply voltage.
W_Zc Power loss in auxiliary impedance Zc.
ATRatio Ratio of main winding ampere-turns/auxiliary winding ampere-turns.
WCuMain Copper loss in main winding.
WCuAux Copper loss in auxiliary winding.
Jmain Current density in main winding.
Jaux Current density in auxiliary winding.
Calc1ph = SymmCpt
Icf RMS core-loss current in positive-sequence mesh.
Icb RMS core-loss current in negative-sequence mesh.
Ef Induced EMF due to positive-sequence field.
Eb Induced EMF due to negative-sequence field.
WFeAxis Fraction of core loss attributed to negative-sequence field. Normally
this is a low value (0.1 or less).
Calc1ph = X-Field
I2m RMS rotor current in main axis.
I2a RMS rotor current in auxiliary axis.
Ic_main RMS core-loss current in main axis.
Ic_aux RMS core-loss current in auxiliary axis.
Emain Induced EMF due to main field.
Eaux Induced EMF due to auxiliary field.
WFeAxis The proportion of the total cores loss that is attributed to the cross-
field; normally this should be a value around 0.5.
WFeBal The iron loss calculated for balanced 2-phase operation.
Drive simulation parameters

Drive simulation parameters..
Drive PWM Vdc 600.0000 V Rdc 7.7000 ohm
ModStrat ST CFrq 29.0000 mIndex 0.7000
IDCwfm 0.5477 A VdcMean 595.7828 V Twfm 0.8259 Nm
IWPk 0.6044 A IWMean 0.3650 A IWRMS 0.4063 A
ILPk 0.6044 A ILMean 0.3650 A ILRMS 0.4063 A
VLL1rms 254.4414 V IL1rms 0.4056 A IW1rms 0.4056 A
dsPhi1 31.6008 deg dsPF1 0.8517 Tloop 0.0000 Nm

IDCwfm Mean current in DC link (Fig. 25).
VdcMean Mean DC voltage at inverter terminals (Fig. 25).
Twfm Mean shaft torque.
IWPk Peak phase current.
IWMean Mean phase current (half-cycle).
IWRMS RMS phase current.
ILPk Peak line current.
ILMean Mean line current (half-cycle).
ILRMS RMS line current.
VLL1rms RMS fundamental line-line voltage at machine terminals.
IL1rms RMS fundamental line current in the machine.
IW1rms RMS fundamental phase current in the machine.
dsPhi1 Fundamental power-factor angle of the machine.
dsPF1 Fundamental power-factor.
Tloop Loop torque computed from the flux-linkage/current loops (Fig. 24).
7 Core losses, Harmonic losses, and Stray Load Losses : -----------------------
WFeS 259.3745 W Wst 94.3700 W WstWkg 14.5629 W/kg
WFeR 0.0000 W Wsy 165.0045 W WsyWkg 16.4968 W/kg
WFeCalc Classical XFe 1.0000 Bd_slot 0.5374 T
Loss components
WFeS Stator iron loss.
WFeR Rotor iron loss. In normal operation WFeR is usually small because of
the low frequency of the electromagnetic field in the rotor.
Wst Core loss in stator teeth.
Wsy Core loss in stator yoke.
Wrt Core loss in rotor teeth.
Wry Core loss in rotor yoke.
WstWkg Specific core loss in stator teeth.
WsyWkg Specific core loss in stator yoke.
WrtWkg Specific core loss in rotor teeth.
WryWkg Specific core loss in rotor yoke.
WFe0 Sine-wave specific core loss [W/kg] at a fundamental frequency of 50Hz
(60Hz if Imperial units are used) and a peak flux density of 1.5T.
If WFeCalc = SPEED, additional parameters are displayed:
WFe0S Specific iron loss in stator steel at 50 Hz (if length units are in) or
60 Hz (if length units are mm). [W/kg or W/lb]
WFe0R Specific iron loss in rotor steel at 50 or 60 Hz. [W/kg or W/lb]
WFe0Sh Specific iron loss in shaft steel at 50 or 60 Hz. [W/kg or W/lb]
WFeSe Eddy-current component of WFeS.
WFeSh Hysteresis component of WFeS.
Wste Eddy-current component of Wst.
Wsth Hysteresis component of Wst.
Wsye Eddy-current component of Wsy.
Wsyh Hysteresis component of Wsy.
WFeRe Eddy-current component of WFeR.
WFeRh Hysteresis component of WFeR.
Wrte Eddy-current component of Wrt.
Wrth Hysteresis component of Wrt.
Wrye Eddy-current component of Wry.
Wryh Hysteresis component of Wry.
Components of stray-load loss
If SLLCalc = Detailed, the stray load loss is WSLL = Wrth + Wsth + Wrt_so.
Wrth Rotor tooth-head loss due to steps in stator MMF wave.
Wsth Stator tooth-head loss due to steps in rotor MMF wave.
Wrt_so Rotor tooth-head loss due to stator slot-openings, which cause a
modulation of the flux wave to run past the rotor teeth.
Additional harmonic components (only if EQcct = Alger)
WB5,WB7,WB11,WB13,
WZm,WZn,WPm,WPn Harmonic I
2
R losses in the rotor corresponding to the slip-
dependent rotor resistances in Algers harmonic equivalent
circuit.
THx Total harmonic torque.
Bd_Slot Flux density dip due to stator slot-opening, used in the calculation of
Wrt_so.
8 Thermal data
The format of this section depends on the choice of thermal model (TempCalc); see
pages 74 and ?ff; and Figs. 108-110.
TempCalc = Fixed
8 Thermal data : --------------------------------------------------------------

TempCalc Fixed HeatFlux 0.2207 kW/m TempRise 110.0000 C
Ambient 20.0000 C
T_wdg 130.0000 C T_rtr 150.0000 C
TempRise Temperature rise, calculated as T_wdg ! Ambient.
HeatFlux Watts per unit of frame surface area, i.e., WTotal/FSArea.
TempCalc = DegC/W
8 Thermal data : --------------------------------------------------------------

TempCalc DegC/W HeatFlux 0.2274 kW/m TempRise 32.9999 C
Ambient 20.0000 C T_c 52.9999 C T_r 52.9999 C
DegCW 3.0000 C/W C_motor 1.7602 kJ/C ThermTC 88.0083 min

T_c Calculated winding temperature.
T_r Calculated rotor temperature, equal to Tcond + (T_rtr ! T_wdg); in other
words, the temperature difference between the rotor and the stator
winding is defined by the input parameters T_wdg and T_rtr.
TempCalc = HTCoeff
8 Thermal data : --------------------------------------------------------------

TempCalc HTCoeff HeatFlux 0.2283 kW/m TempRise 23.0340 C
Ambient 20.0000 C T_c 43.0340 C T_r 43.0340 C
HTC 10.0000 W/mC T_y 42.8308 C T_f 42.8308 C
HTTC 0.0000 %/C
ThRSlot 0.0534 C/W R_fa 2.0669 C/W ThR_ws 0.0000 C/W
FSArea 48380.5269 mm^2 C_motor 1.7602 kJ/C ThermTC 60.6362 min
T_f Temperature of the frame, Ambient + WTotal ThR_fs.
ThRslot Thermal resistance of slot liner, calculated from liner contact area
SSArea and thermal conductivity of liner, ct_Liner.
R_fa Equivalent thermal resistance from frame surface to ambient, calculated
as 1/(h FSArea), where h = HTC [1 + HTTC (Tframe - Ambient)].
TempCalc = Hot10 or Hot16
The Hot10 and Hot16 thermal models generate much more data than the others. The
following description is mainly for Hot10, with necessary Hot16 additions.
8 Thermal data : --------------------------------------------------------------

TempCalc Hot10 HeatFlux 1.1694 kW/m TempRise 44.4360 C
Ambient 20.0000 C T_c 64.4360 C T_r 66.9519 C
Hot10ss true T_y 60.6237 C T_f 59.8666 C
LCL 31.1931 mm Liner 0.4000 mm ct_liner 0.2000 W/mC
ACL 1559.6551 mm^2 C_motor 1.5987 kJ/C ThRSlot 0.1169 C/W
FSArea 51622.6505 mm^2 ThermTC 17.6613 min R_fa 0.6628 C/W
The first section is similar to section 8 for the simpler thermal models, and is a
summary of the same parameters used in those models.
T_c The average conductor temperature, at which the winding resistance is
computed. (Node C in Fig. 110).
T_r The rotor temperature. (Node R in Fig. 110).
T_y The stator core temperature. (Node Y in Fig. 110).
T_f The frame temperature. (Node F in Fig. 110).
Hot10ss Indicates whether the Hot10 model has converged to a steady state. See
HBalTol.
C_motor The total thermal capacitance of the machine. This is used in the
calculation of the thermal time-constant, ThermTC.
ThermTC The thermal time-constant, calculated as C_motor R_fa.
R_fa The total thermal resistance from frame to ambient.
T1 Final temperatures
TempCalc Hot16 HeatFlux 1.1531 kW/m TempRise 24.8538 C
Ambient 20.0000 C T_c 44.8538 C T_r 48.8277 C
Hot10ss true T_y 43.9512 C T_f 42.4333 C
LCL 31.1931 mm Liner 0.4000 mm ct_liner 0.2000 W/mC
ACL 1559.6551 mm^2 C_motor 1.5987 kJ/C ThRSlot 0.1169 C/W
FSArea 51622.6505 mm^2 ThermTC 17.9853 min R_fa 0.6750 C/W
Individual node temperatures are identified by the node letter, e.g. c for node C
(conductors at the centre of the machine). The theory assumes a uniform rate of heat
generation along the conductors, giving rise to the following relationships between
T_c, TmaxWdg and TminWdg, [1]:
TmaxWdg Maximum winding temperature. If T_e < T_c, TmaxWdg = (3 T_c ! T_e)/2,
but if T_e > T_c, TmaxWdg = T_e.
TminWdg Minimum winding temperature. It T_e < T_c, TminWdg = T_e, but if T_e >
T_c, TminWdg = 3 T_c ! 2 T_e.
In the Hot16 model these relationships are replaced by more complex expressions
which are described in SEM, Ch.1.
Additional temperatures in Hot16 model
Ti_1 20.0000 C Ti_2 20.0000 C
To_1 20.6519 C To_2 20.6519 C
T_f1 41.7147 C T_e1 44.9130 C T_r1 49.8583 C
T_f2 41.7147 C T_e2 44.9130 C T_r2 49.8583 C
Tmid_F 42.7667 C Tmid_C 44.8253 C Tmid_R 49.8870 C
Tmax_F 42.7667 C Tmax_C 44.9130 C Tmax_R 49.8870 C
uTmax_F 0.5000 uTmax_C 1.0000 uTmax_R 0.5000
To_1 Air exhaust temperature at drive end, Fig. 47. [EC or EF]
To_2 Air exhaust temperature at opposite drive end, Fig. 47.
T_f1 Temperature at "capacity node" F1, Fig. 47.
T_f2 Temperature at "capacity node" F1, Fig. 47.
T_e1 Temperature at "capacity node" F1, Fig. 47.
T_e2 Temperature at "capacity node" F1, Fig. 47.
T_r1 Temperature at "capacity node" F1, Fig. 47.
T_r2 Temperature at "capacity node" F1, Fig. 47.
Tmid_F Temperature at the mid-point of the frame, Fig. 47.
Tmid_C Temperature at the mid-point of the stator conductors, Fig. 47.
Tmid_R Temperature at the mid-point of the frame, Fig. 47.
Tmax_F Maximum temperature along the frame, Fig. 47.
Tmax_C Maximum temperature along the stator conductors, Fig. 47.
Tmax_R Maximum temperature along the rotor bars, Fig. 47.
uTmax_F Location of maximum temperature (hotspot) along the frame, normalized
to Lstk. A value of 0 means the drive end; 1 means the opposite-drive
end; and 0@5 means the middle. See Fig. 47.
uTmax_C Location of hotspot along the stator conductors.
uTmax_R Location of hotspot along the rotor bars.
T2 Heat sources
WCuS 25.4174 W WCu_slot 12.5273 W WCu_end 12.8900 W
Wrotor 29.7159 W WCuR 29.7159 W WFeR 0.0000 W
WFeS 1.9330 W Wst 1.3080 W Wsy 0.6249 W
Wwf 1.4063 W W_brg 0.0000 W WSLL 1.0529 W
WTotal 59.5253 W WCuRbars 26.2315 W WCuRends 3.4844 W
WCuS Total Joule loss in the stator winding (I
2
R or "copper loss").
WCu_slot Joule loss within the stator slots, i.e. within Lstk .
WCu_end Joule loss in the end-turns.
Wrotor Total rotor loss.
WCuR Joule loss ("copper loss") in rotor cage.
WFeR Rotor iron loss.
WFeS Stator iron loss.
Wst Iron loss in stator teeth.
Wsy Iron loss in stator yoke.
Wwf Windage and friction loss.
W_brg Bearing loss.
WSLL Stray load loss.
WTotal Total machine losses.
WCuRBars Joule loss ("copper loss") in the rotor bars within Lstk
WCuRends Joule loss in the rotor end-rings.
T3 Forced heat extraction rates
BlowCool 0.0000 W OverCool 0.0000 W WireCool 0.0000 W
AxleCool 0.0000 W Cooling 0.0000 W
These do not include the forced-air cooling in the Hot16 model.
Cooling The sum of all forced heat extraction rates.
T4a Total heat flows
q_Absorb 0.0041 W q_Source 59.5253 W q_Disspn 59.5212 W
q_Absorb The sum of all "residual" heat flows in all the thermal capacitances.
In the steady-state, by definition, q_Absorb = 0. If q_Absorb > WTotal
HBalTol, Hot10ss will be false, indicating that the thermal transient
calculation has not reached the "steady-state" defined by HBalTol. In
this case the calculation time hTime should be increased.
q_Source The sum of all losses that cause power to be dissipated in the machine.
This is the same as WTotal.
q_Disspn The sum of all heat flows away from the machine, equal to q_Source
q_Absorb. In the steady-state, q_Disspn = q_Source.
T4b Heat flows from node to node
i_ct 11.0052 W i_cy 5.8875 W i_fa 33.2348 W
i_ce -4.3653 W i_ef 0.0000 W i_re 0.0000 W
i_yf 24.7970 W i_ty 17.4178 W i_ts -4.9201 W
i_sg -4.9206 W i_rg 3.5144 W i_gf 0.0000 W
i_rh 21.8107 W i_hb 21.7838 W i_bf 21.7837 W
i_dr 25.3256 W
... axial internal conduction (Hot16 only)
i_f1F 12.3985 W i_e1C -2.1827 W i_r1D 0.4529 W
i_f2F 12.3985 W i_e2C -2.1827 W i_r2D 0.4529 W
Heat flows from node to node are identified by the node letters: for example, i_ce
= 9 W means that 9 W is flowing from node E to node C, while i_ct = 10 W means that
10 W is flowing from node C to node T. When checking the heat flows, remember that
losses are injected at certain nodes.
The Hot10 model also gives the axial heat transfer from the "airflow" nodes to the
interior of the respective component. Positive values indicate heat flow towards the
node on its way to the airflow:
i_f1F Interior heat flow at frame node F1.
i_e1C Interior heat flow at end-winding node E1.
i_r1F Interior heat flow at rotor end-ring node R1.
i_f2F Interior heat flow at frame node F2.
i_e2C Interior heat flow at end-winding node E2.
i_r2D Interior heat flow at rotor end-ring node R2.
T4c Frame-to-ambient modes
CalcFAU Fixed CalcFAV HTC CalcFAR Calculate
CalcFAK None
These input parameters define the method of heat transfer to the surroundings.
T4d Ambient heat flows
i_FAU 14.9555 W i_FAV 11.5807 W i_FAR 6.6762 W
i_fak 0.0224 W i_ha 0.0268 W i_fa 33.2348 W
This section collects together all heat flows to the ambient-temperature node A
except those associated with forced air cooling in the Hot16 model.
... Forced air cooling (Hot16 only)
iFQ_1 6.6728 W iEQ_1 4.2621 W iRQ_1 2.1950 W
iFQ_2 6.6728 W iEQ_2 4.2621 W iRQ_2 2.1950 W
TEF_1 20.3206 C TRE_1 20.1090 C
TEF_2 20.3206 C TRE_2 20.1090 C
FACCType HTC
AHT_F1 15594.8659 mm^2 AHT_E1 8591.4483 mm^2 AHT_R1 3675.6855 mm^2
AHT_F2 15594.8659 mm^2 AHT_E2 8591.4483 mm^2 AHT_R2 3675.6855 mm^2
HTC_F1 20.0000 W/mC HTC_E1 20.0000 W/mC HTC_R1 20.0000 W/mC
HTC_F2 20.0000 W/mC HTC_E2 20.0000 W/mC HTC_R2 20.0000 W/mC
TC_FACC 0.0000 %/C
Ti_1 20.0000 C Qair_1 0.0250 m/s Uair_1 20.0000 %
Ti_2 20.0000 C Qair_2 0.0250 m/s Uair_2 20.0000 %
iFQ_1 Heat flow from node F1 to air at drive end : see Fig. 47 on p. 91.
iEQ_1 Heat flow from node E1 to air at drive end.
iRQ_1 Heat flow from node R1 to air at drive end.
iFQ_2 Heat flow from node F2 to air at non-drive end.
iEQ_2 Heat flow from node E2 to air at non-drive end.
iRQ_2 Heat flow from node R2 to air at non-drive end.
TRE_1 Intermediate air temperature between nodes R1 and E1, Fig. 47.
TEF_1 Intermediate air temperature between nodes E1 and F1, Fig. 47.
TRE_2 Intermediate air temperature between nodes R2 and E2, Fig. 47.
TEF_2 Intermediate air temperature between nodes E2 and F2, Fig. 47.
AHT_F1 Heat-transfer area at drive end of frame, Fig. 48.
AHT_E1 Heat-transfer area over end-windings at drive end, Fig. 48.
AHT_R1 Heat-transfer area over end-rings at drive end, Fig. 48.
AHT_F2 Heat-transfer area at non-drive end of frame, Fig. 48.
AHT_E2 Heat-transfer area over end-windings at non-drive end, Fig. 48.
AHT_R2 Heat-transfer area over end-rings at non-drive end, Fig. 48.
T4e Residual heat balance at nodes
q_C 0.0000 W q_t 4.7880E-04 W q_y 0.0012 W
q_e 0.0000 W q_g 4.3058E-05 W
q_r 5.5230E-04 W q_h 9.0596E-05 W q_f 0.0000 W
q_b 8.7679E-05 W q_s 4.8506E-04 W q_a 33.2616 W
q_f1 1.8563E-04 W q_f2 1.8563E-04 W
q_e1 2.9168E-04 W q_e2 2.9168E-04 W
q_r1 1.3078E-04 W q_r2 1.3078E-04 W
This section gives the heat absorption rate in the thermal capacitance at every
node. The sum of these terms is q_Absorb. The A node effectively has infinite
thermal capacitance, so in the steady state all the losses are absorbed at this
node, herein, making q_a = q_fa in the Hot10 model. q_a does not include the
forced-air cooling in the Hot16 model.
T5a Thermal Resistances (specified values)
thR_CT 0.0000 C/W thR_CY 0.0000 C/W thR_TY 0.0000 C/W
thR_TS 0.0000 C/W thR_CE 0.0000 C/W thR_YF 0.0000 C/W
ThR_EF 1000.0000 C/W ThR_RE 1000.0000 C/W thR_SG 0.0000 C/W
thR_RG 0.0000 C/W ThR_GF 1000.0000 C/W ThR_BF 0.1000 C/W
thR_RH 0.0000 C/W ThR_HB 0.1000 C/W thR_FAK 1.5000 C/W
thR_FAU 1.5000 C/W thR_FAV 1.5000 C/W thR_FAR 1.5000 C/W
All these are input parameters.
T5b Thermal Resistances (calculated values)
R_fa 0.6628 C/W R_fak 1000.0000 C/W R_fau 1.5000 C/W
R_fav 1.9371 C/W R_far 3.0790 C/W
R_yf 0.0210 C/W R_ts 0.0464 C/W R_ty 0.0464 C/W
R_yfc 0.0000 C/W R_yfd 0.0210 C/W R_yfa 0.0000 C/W
R_ct 0.1794 C/W R_cy 0.3354 C/W R_ce 0.0290 C/W
R_cta 0.0000 C/W R_cya 0.0000 C/W R_sg 0.4357 C/W
R_dr 4.1469 C/W R_rh 0.0934 C/W R_rg 0.4357 C/W
R_ef 1000.0000 C/W R_re 1000.0000 C/W R_gf 1000.0000 C/W
R_bf 0.1000 C/W R_hb 0.1000 C/W R_ha 1000.0000 C/W
The calculated thermal resistances are denoted by R_ with a double subscript
indicating the "from" and "to" nodes to which the thermal resistance is connected.
For example R_yf is the thermal resistance from node Y (stator yoke) to node F
(frame).
Some of the thermal resistances have more than one component. The components have
an additional subscript. For example R_yf = R_yfc R_yfd R_yfa. Equations for
the components are given in the tables beginning on p. 86.
T6 Thermal Capacitances
C_Cu 0.2553 kJ/C C_c 0.1258 kJ/C C_e 0.1295 kJ/C
C_SFe 0.7157 kJ/C C_t 0.2039 kJ/C C_y 0.5058 kJ/C
C_r 0.3483 kJ/C C_RFe 0.2361 kJ/C C_cage 0.1122 kJ/C
C_Frame 0.1819 kJ/C C_Shaft 0.0397 kJ/C C_Cap 0.0134 kJ/C
C_Brg 0.0397 kJ/C
C_g 0.0182 kJ/C C_motor 1.5987 kJ/C
A thermal capacitance C_ with a single subscript is the total value at the node
whose identifying letter is the subscript.
C_Cu The total thermal capacitance of the stator copper, C_c + C_e.
C_SFe The total thermal capacitance of the stator iron, C_t + C_y.
C_RFe The thermal capacitance of the rotor iron.
C_cage The thermal capacitance of the rotor cage, including bars and end-rings.
C_Frame The thermal capacitance of the frame.
C_Shaft The thermal capacitance of the shaft.
C_Cap The thermal capacitance of one end-cap. For information only; both end-
caps are included in C_Frame.
C_g The thermal capacitance of the airgap. If AddC_g = 0, this is set to
C_Frame/10; otherwise it is set equal to AddC_g.
C_Brg The total thermal capacitance of the bearings. If AddC_B = 0, this is
set to C_Shaft/5; otherwise it is set equal to AddC_B.
T7 Additional Thermal Capacitances
AddC_Cu 0.0000 kJ/C AddC_Y 0.0000 kJ/C AddC_R 0.0000 kJ/C
AddC_Cg 0.0000 kJ/C AddC_F 0.0000 kJ/C AddC_H 0.0000 kJ/C
AddC_B 0.0000 kJ/C AddC_G 0.0000 kJ/C AddC_T 0.0000 kJ/C
These are all input parameters : see the Table on p. 78.
T8 Specific Heats...
cp_Cu 0.3831 kJ/kgC cp_SFe 0.4500 kJ/kgC cp_RFe 0.4500 kJ/kgC
cp_Bars 0.8960 kJ/kgC cp_Frame 0.8960 kJ/kgC cp_Shaft 0.4500 kJ/kgC
These are all input parameters.
T9 Initial temperatures for Hot10 thermal calculation
Ambient 20.0000 C IT_C 25.0000 C IT_S 25.0000 C
IT_R 25.0000 C IT_H 25.0000 C IT_F 25.0000 C
IT_E 25.0000 C IT_Y 25.0000 C IT_G 25.0000 C
IT_T 25.0000 C
These are all input parameters.
T10 Other Thermal Parameters
h0_N 7.5000 h0_F 125.0000 V_air 0.0000 ft/min
Emiss 0.9000 rx_yf 0.0000 C/W m^2
ct_liner 0.2000 W/mC ct_lam 38.0000 W/mC ct_wins 0.2000 W/mC
ct_Frame 204.0000 W/mC ct_Oxide 0.1000 W/mC
h_yf 0.0000 W/mC h_cy 0.0000 W/mC h_dr 0.0000 W/mC
T_gap 50.0000 C k_gap 0.0291 W/mC nu_gap 1.9381E-05 m^2/s
Ta 7.4192 Nu 2.0000 alpha 145.5233
FSArea 51622.6505 mm^2 FFArea 51622.6505 mm^2 ACL 1559.6551 mm^2
KC1 6.7000 KC2 0.9600 Kn 0.8000
Chamfer 0.0000 mm
k_gap Thermal conductivity of air or water in airgap.
nu_gap Kinematic viscosity of air or water in airgap.
Ta Modified Taylor number, [30].
Nu Parameter used in airgap thermal resistance calculation.
alpha Parameter used in airgap thermal resistance calculation.
T11 Control parameters for thermal transient calculation
thm_dt 1.0000 sec hTime 100.0000 min XThLoss 1.0000
HBalTol 0.1000 htFinal 100.0167 min
htFinal The time at the end of the transient thermal calculation.
T12 Additional dimensions used with thermal calculation
LFrame 100.0000 mm FrThk 2.0000 mm FrDens 2700.0000 kg/m
FrLgthM Add FrLgth+ 50.0000 mm
N_Fins 0.0000 LFin 0.0000 mm
FinThk 0.0000 mm CapThk 3.0000 mm RFinL1 0.0000 mm
NRFins1 0 RFinThk1 0.0000 mm RFinL2 0.0000 mm
NRFins2 0 RFinThk2 0.0000 mm
AirLiner 0.0000 mm AirFilm 0.0000 mm BarOxide 0.0100 mm
LFrame Frame length determined from FrLgth and FrLgthM.
T13 Weighting factors for injection of iron and stray loss
XWFe_Y 0.5000 XWFe_T 0.5000 XWFe_S 0.0000
XWFe_R 0.0000
These are input parameters.
T14 Thermal Node Types
tnt_m Floating tnt_b Floating tnt_h Floating
tnt_r Floating tnt_g Floating tnt_s Floating
tnt_e Floating tnt_c Floating tnt_t Floating
tnt_y Floating tnt_f Floating
These are input parameters.
9 Miscellaneous parameters : --------------------------------------------------

Wt_Cu 0.6664 kg Wt_Fe 2.1151 kg Wt_Tot 2.9067 kg
WtFeS 1.5903 kg WtFeR 0.5248 kg
WtFesy 1.1239 kg WtFest 0.4531 kg WtTri 0.1444 kg
Wt_Al 0.1252 kg WtAl_RB 0.0590 kg WtAl_ER 0.0662 kg
WtShaft 0.0882 kg
RotJ 2.1314E-04 kg-m JL 0.0000 p.u. JFan 0.0000 p.u.
C_cage 0.1122 kJ/C C_main 0.2553 kJ/C
WtFrame 0.2030 kg WtCap 0.0150 kg
Ecc 0.0000 UMP 5.3228E-16 kg
FrThk 2.0000 mm LFrame 100.0000 mm CapThk 3.0000 mm
FrLgthM Add FrLgth+ 50.0000 mm
TRV 5432.1028 lbft/m3T/Wt 0.1835 lbft/kgP/Wt 29.3055 W/kg
Wf0 10.0000 W RPM0 3000.0000 rpm NWFT 1.0000
CanStyle None
RTC_OC 0.0578 sec RTC_SC 0.0055 sec
Wt_Cu Weight of copper in stator winding.
Wt_Fe Weight of lamination steel.
Wt_Tot Total weight excluding shaft and frame): Wt_Cu + Wt_Al + Wt_Fe.
WtFeS Weight of iron in stator.
WtFeR Weight of iron in rotor.
WtFesy Weight of iron in stator yoke.
WtFest Weight of iron in stator teeth.
WtTri Weight of "Rabinovici triangles" used in calculating Wsy, [15].
Wt_Al Weight of rotor cage (bars plus both end-rings). Although the name
suggests aluminium, other materials can be specified via CgDens.
WtAl_RB Weight of rotor bars. See CgDens.
WtAl_ER Combined weight of both end-rings. See CgDens.
RotJ Polar moment of inertia (including the shaft). Uses CgDens for the rotor
cage, and ERDens for the end-rings. The shaft dimensions are taken from
Fig. 80 and the shaft density is taken from the shaft steel in the
database. RotJ is not calculated when MConfig = Ext.
WtShaft Weight of shaft. The shaft dimensions are taken from Fig. 80 and the
shaft density is taken from the shaft steel in the database. WtShaft
is not calculated when MConfig = Ext.
WtFrame Frame weight.
WtCap Weight of one end-cap.
LFrame The length of the frame used in thermal calculations. See FrLgthM.
TRV The ratio of shaft torque to rotor volume.
T Wt The ratio of shaft torque to total active weight.
P Wt The ratio of shaft power to total active weight.
Additional parameters for split-phase motors
WtCuMain Weight of copper in main winding.
WtCuAux Weight of copper in auxiliary winding.
9a Settings --------------------------------------------------------------------

EQcct SPEED RcLoc GapFlux
XmTol 1.0000 DiffLeak Alger EndLeak SPEED
InterBar Off IBRes 0.0745 Ohms/mm^2
Xm.. 50.0000 ohm Rc.. 10000.0000 ohm
TbrkTol 0.0000 dslip 0.0000 p.u.
XLst 1.0000 XLys 1.0000 XLyr 1.0000
XXskew 1.0000 XR1 1.0000
XTh5 1.0000 XTh7 1.0000 XTh11 1.0000
XTh13 1.0000 XThmm 1.0000 XThmn 1.0000
XThpm 1.0000 XThpn 1.0000
XTLR 1.0000 XTBrk 1.0000
This section contains various "settings" parameters that may not appear elsewhere
in the design sheet.
10 Rated and partial load performance : --------------------------------------
1.50 1.25 FLT 0.75 0.50 0.25 0.00
Torque [Nm] 107.655 86.683 67.675 49.828 32.692 16.115 1.36E-05
Power [W] 1.50E+04 1.25E+04 1.00E+04 7506.535 5003.433 2500.414 2.14E-03
Eff [%] 74.0435 79.2060 82.7862 85.2043 86.0914 82.2820 4.92E-04
P.F. 0.9076 0.9149 0.9079 0.8787 0.7999 0.5577 0.0892
Iph [A rms] 17.9321 13.8654 10.6920 8.0533 5.8361 4.3768 3.9279
Slip 0.1128 0.0813 0.0588 0.0409 0.0257 0.0122 4.95E-05
The above table contains shaft torque, shaft power, efficiency, power factor, RMS
phase current and rotor slip at full load (as defined by PowrSh.. or TorqSh..) and
at 150%, 125%, 75%, 50%, 25% and 0% of the full load, respectively. This section
is displayed only if CalcMode = f/PowerSh or f/TorqSh and DoPart = true.
Page 150 References PC-IMD 9.04
14
This text includes all the basic theory of the induction machine, as well as many problems and
solutions. It is available on the SPEED installation CD. Many of the most advanced algorithms are
described in IEEE and other conference papers.
3.4 References
Ref. [1] is the main introduction to the theory in the SPEED programs.
1. SPEEDs Electric Motors, the theory text that is used with the SPEED training
courses.
14

2. Say MG, The performance and design of alternating current machines, Pitman,
London, Second Edition, 1948
3. Alger PL, Induction machines, their behavior and uses, Gordon + Breach Science
Publishers, New York, London, Paris, Second Edition, 1970. [Original edition,
copyrighted 1965 under the title The nature of induction machines]. Library
of Congress Catalog Card No. 64-18799
4. Heller B and Hamata V, Harmonic field effects in induction machines, Elsevier,
Amsterdam, Oxford, New York, 1977 ISBN0-444-99856-X
5. Veinott CG, Theory and design of small induction motors, McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1959
6. Kostenko M and Piotrovsky L, Electrical machines, (two volumes), MIR
Publishers, Moscow, 3rd edition, 1974
7. Fitzgerald AE and Kingsley C Jr., Electric machinery, McGraw-Hill, Second
Edition, 1961
8. Richter R., Elektrische Maschinen, Springer, 1954
9. Schuisky W, Berechnung Elektrischer Maschinen, Springer, 1960
10. Vas P, Electrical machines and drives: a space-vector theory approach,
Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1992 ISBN 0-19-859378-3
11. Wood WS, Flynn F and Shanmugasundaram A, Transient torques in induction
motors, due to switching of the supply, Proc. IEE, Vol. 112, No. 7, July 1965,
pp. 1348-1354
12. Engelmann RH and Middendorf WH [Eds], Handbook of electric motors, Marcel
Dekker, New York, Basel, Hong Kong, 1995, ISBN 0-8247-8915-6
13. Morrill WJ, The revolving-field theory of the capacitor motor, Trans AIEE,
April 1929, pp. 614!632.
14. Levi E, Polyphase motors: a direct approach to their design, John Wiley and
Sons Inc., New York, 1984 ISBN 0-471-89866-X
15. Hendershot JR and Miller TJE, Design of brushless permanent-magnet motors,
Magna Physics Publications/Oxford University Press, 1994 ISBN0-19-859389-9
16. Veinott CG and Martin JE, Fractional and subfractional horsepower electric
motors, Fourth edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company 1992, ISBN 0-07-067393-4
17. Boldea I, Deep bar effect for slots of any shape, hand-written notes, SPEED
Laboratory, 1995.
18. Ionel DM, Cistelecan MV, Miller TJE and McGilp MI, A new analytical method for
the computation of airgap reactances in 3-phase induction motors, IEEE
Industry Applications Society, Annual Meeting, St. Louis 12-15 October 1998,
pp. 65!72.
PC-IMD 9.04 References Page 151
19. Miller TJE, Gliemann JH, Rasmussen CB and Ionel DM, Analysis of a tapped-
winding capacitor motor, ICEM 98, Istanbul, 2-4 September 1998, Vol. I, pp.
581!585.
20. Kopilov IP, Goriainov FA, Klokob BK, Design of Electrical Machines (in
Russian: Proektirovanie elektriceskih masin), Moscow, Energhia, 1980.
21. Puchstein AF and Lloyd TC, The cross-field theory of the capacitor motor,
Trans. AIEE, Vol. 60, February 1941, pp. 58!63.
22. Puchstein AF and Lloyd TC, Capacitor motors with windings not in quadrature,
Trans. AIEE, November 1935, pp. 1235!1239.
23. Kingsley C and Lyon WV, Analysis of unsymmetrical machines, Trans. AIEE, May
1936, pp. 471!476.
24. Trickey PH, Performance calculations on capacitor motors; the revolving field
theory, Trans. AIEE, Vol. 60, February 1941, pp. 73!76.
25. Trickey PH, Capacitor motor performance calculations by the cross-field
theory, Trans.AIEE, Vol. 76, February 1957, pp. 1547!1553.
26. Suhr FW, Symmetrical components as applied to the single-phase induction
motor, Trans.AIEE, Vol. 64, September 1945, pp. 651!655.
27. McFarland TC, Current loci for the capacitor motor, Trans. AIEE, Vol. 61,
March 1942, pp. 152!155.
28. Bewley LV, Alternating current machinery, Macmillan, N.Y. 1949.
29. Norman HM, Induction motor locked saturation curves, Trans. AIEE, Vol. 53,
1934, pp. 536!541.
30. Kylander G, Thermal modelling of small cage induction motors, Technical report
No. 265, 1995, PhD dissertation, Chalmers University of Technology. The
equation in PC-IMD is not Kylanders original but simplified by J.H. Gliemann.
31. Dorrell DG, Miller TJE, Rasmussen CB [2001] Interbar Currents in Induction
Machines, IEEE Industry Applications Society, IAS 2001, Chicago, USA, 30 Sep
5 Oct. 2001.
32. Miller TJE, Boldea I, Dorrell DG, Rasmussen CB [2000] Leakage Reactance
Saturation in Induction Motors, ICEM 2000, Helsinki, Finland, 28-30 August
2000 pp. 203-207.
33. Murphy JMD and Turnbull FG, Power electronic control of AC motors, Pergamon
Press, 1988. ISBN 0-08-022683-3.
34. Mohan N, Undeland T and Robbins WP, Power electronics: converters,
applications and design, John Wiley and Sons, N.Y., 1989.
35. Cochrane PL, Polyphase induction motor: analysis, design and application,
Marcel Dekker, N.Y., 1989. ISBN 0-8247-8043-4.
36. Krause PC, Wasynczuk O, and Sudhoff, S, Analysis of electric machinery, IEEE
Press, N.Y., 1995
Page 152 Reference diagrams PC-IMD 9.04
Fig. 58 Type 3 rotor bar
Fig. 56 Type 0 rotor bar : Closed
3.5 Reference diagrams
Fig. 57 Type 1 rotor bar : round bar
PC-IMD 9.04 Reference diagrams Page 153
Fig. 59 Type 2: rectangular or T bar
(RWjType = None)
Fig. 60 Type 2 : RwjType = Type1 Fig. 61 Type 2 : RWjType = Type2
When w2 < SO_R, the h2 section has sloping sides as shown by the dotted lines.
With a cast cage in Fig. 60, when SBFull ' False the conductor fills the shaded
area, but when SBFull ' True it fills the entire slot. With a wound rotor (MConfig
' WR), the coilsides occupy only the BarDpth section.
With a cast cage in Figs. 61 and 62, when SBFull ' False the conductor fills the
shaded area, but when SBFull ' True it fills the entire slot. With a wound rotor
(MConfig ' WR), the coilsides occupy only the BarDpth section.
Fig. 69 Open custom rotor bar
Fig. 70 Closed custom rotor bar
Fig. 71 Type G rotor bar. There are 10 sections. Dimensions shown for section 5 are
typical for all sections 29. Each layer can have its own conductivity. The slot
can be closed by setting muPlug = 0.
Fig. 73 End-ring dimensions generally pertinent to end-rings Types A,B and C. With Type
D, the inside diameter is an input parameter (ERIDia1/2) and so is the outside
diameter (ERODia1/2). The subscripts 1/2 refer to the left or right-hand ends.
With Type D end-rings, or with Type A and Rim <> 0, the fin is rectangular, i.e.,
both the inside and outside edges of the fin are parallel to the axis. Fins are
not available with Type B or Type C end-rings. The end-view is shown with 8 fins,
i.e. NRFins1/2 = 8. Also see ERID1/2 and EROD1/2 on page 116.
Fig. 72 (a) Gross punched area ARslot. If SBFull = true, this entire
area is occupied by the bar, except for Shrinkage;
(b) Area Abar when SBFull = false (shown with Shrink = 0);
(c) Plug defined by muPlug.
Fig. 74 End-ring configurations, specified with ERType1 and ERType2. The hatched areas
are the conductive cross-sectional areas of the end-rings.
The names have a subscript 1 for the lefthand end, and 2 for the righthand end: for example,
ERthk1 at the left, and ERthk2 at the right.
For endrings Type A and Type C, the crosssection is exactly rectangular if Rim ' 0. Also
see ERID1/2 and EROD1/2 on page 116.
Fig. 76 Longitudinal section showing frame dimensions. See page 79.
Fig. 75 Definition of Ext and LaxPack
Fig. 77 Fin dimensions

Fig. 78 Axial view showing rotor overhang ROH, together with radial ventilating ducts
WSDuct and WRDuct.
Fig. 79 Dimensions of shaft used for calculating shaft weight and inertia. Note the
axial extensions and the configuration of the slip-rings and brushgear (for
wound-rotor motors only).
Fig. 80 Lamination shapes, LamShape
Fig. 81 LamShape = Annulus
Fig. 82 Stator slot : Round
Fig. 83 Stator slot: Square
Fig. 84 Stator slot: PllSquare Fig. 85 Stator slot: PllRound

The shaded area in Figs. 8393 is ASlot.
The "tang angle" in Figs. 83,84,85,86,89,91 and 93 can be defined in two ways:
If TGorSO ' TGang, the tang angle is defined by TGANG_S
If TGorSO ' SOang, the tang angle is defined by SOAng
Fig. 86 Stator slot: PllSlot
SwjType = None
Fig. 87 Stator slot : PllSlot;
SWjType = Type1
Fig. 88 Stator slot : PllSlot;
SWjType = Type2
The shaded area in Figs. 8393 is ASlot.
The "tang angle" in Figs. 83,84,85,86,89,91 and 93 can be defined in two ways:
If TGorSO ' TGang, the tang angle is defined by TGANG_S
If TGorSO ' SOang, the tang angle is defined by "SOAng
Fig. 89 Stator slot: PllTooth
Fig. 91 Stator slot: HW
Fig. 90 Stator slot: Flared
Fig. 92 Stator slot : S-Slot = VarDpth. SlotOrd defines slots A,B,C,D as shown in
Fig. 94. Subscript _A, _B etc defines variable slot-depth; for example SDS_A is the
slot-depth of slot A, SDS_B is the slot-depth of slot B, etc. The fillet radius at
the bottom of the slot is also specific to each of the A,B,C,D slots: thus filSB_A,
filSB_B, etc.
Fig. 93 Stator slot order with S-Slot = VarDpth and SlotOrd = ABBCD (by
way of example). This pattern covers half a pole-pitch. It is
mirrored in the next half-pole-pitch, so that over one pole-
pitch the order is ABBCDDCBBA. All other poles repeat this
pattern.
Fig. 94 Dimensions of stator slot and liner
Fig. 95 Dimensions of top wedge and phase separator.
(a)
Gross punched area
(b)
Aslot
AslotLL
with TopStick
(c) (d)
AslotLL
no TopStick
(e) (f) (g) (h)
AslotLL
with TopStick
and TopWedge
AslotLL
no TopStick
with TopWedge
SFillHBL array is calculated slot-by-slot,
taking into account the phase separator.
Maximum SFillHBL is also identified.
AslotLL and SFillHBL are not affected by
the phase separators.
Phase
separator
Top
wedge
TopStick
Liner
Top
wedge
Fig. 96 Definition of slot area.
(a) Gross punched area.
(b) Aslot.
(c) AslotLL when TopStick = true.
(d) AslotLL when TopStick = false.
(e) AslotLL with TopStick and TopWedge (see Fig. 96)
{f} AslotLL with TopWedge but no TopStick
(g) as (e) but with one phase separator.
(h) as (f) but with one phase separator.
Fig. 97 Disposition of nested coils when WdgType ' ConcUser. The outermost coil has
TC01 turns and its throw ("span") is Throw. The span of each successive coil
is 2 slot-pitches less than that of its predecessor.
Fig. 98 Definition of "conductor". In this example of a composite conductor, NSH_1
' 3 and NSH_2 ' 2. By definition, a "conductor" carries the phase current
divided by PPaths.
T
c
T
c
T
ph
=
Coils/pole No. of poles T
c
Parallel paths
=
160 2 4
2
= 640
T
c
T
c
T
c
T
c
T
c
Coils/Pole = 2
Parallel paths a = 2
Coils/phase = 8
T
c
Turns in series/phase
T
c
= 160
I
ph
I
ph
Each turn (and each conductor) carries the current
a
One turn = 2 conductors ("go" and "return")
Total No. of conductors Z = T
ph
2 N
ph
a
Turns/Coil = T
c
One coil
AC motor stator showing one phase winding (of 3)
One phase (of 3)
Internal
star point
Main
terminal
= 640 2 3 2 = 7,680
Phase
belt
Fig. 99 Winding definitions
Fig. 102 This type of "staggered" double cage is classified as "double cage" in PC-IMD.
Two separate branches are used in the rotor equivalent circuit, one for each
cage.
Fig. 100 Single rotor bar, showing the Percent Conductivity (PC1) relative to copper at
20EC. TCC1 is the temperature coefficient of PC1. Rotor types 0,1,2,3,5,6,9
and Closed Custom.
Fig. 101 "Stacked" double-cage bar. Two different bar materials are allowed, and
the neck can also be filled with conductor according to the percentage
conductivities PC1, PC2 and PCN. In PC-IMD this type of bar is classified
as "single cage", and the Boldea deep-bar algorithm is used to account for
the deep-bar effect (including the variation of conductivity). Types
4,7,8,10 and Open Custom.

15
Note that the number of phases in the rotor winding is assumed to be 3, although any number of phases
could theoretically be used.
Fig. 103 Rotor winding of the "modified wave" type; see (Ref. [35])
The example rotor winding in Fig. 104 is for a 6pole rotor with 54 slots. The span
or "throw" is Throw_R ' 9 slots, which is fullpitch. A group of six coils makes
up almost a complete tour of the rotor, starting at S in slot 0 and finishing at F
in slot 53. The coilspan of the last coil in the group is shortened by one
slotpitch so that the next "tour" occupies the slots one slotpitch to the left of
those in the first tour. (The beginnings of the second tour are shown by the dashed
line). The resulting winding is a kind of retrogressive wave winding, although it
differs from the retrogressive wave windings found in commutator machines in that
the retrogression is concentrated in one location instead of being uniformly spread
throughout the winding. It permits (indeed it requires) the number of rotor slots
to be a multiple of the number of poles and the number of phases a desirable
feature in ensuring a balanced rotor winding.
15

One "tour" of the rotor in Fig. 104 occupies 6 1 ' 6 layers, or Poles layers, and
in a 2layer winding the total number of available layers is 2 the number of rotor
slots. One phase will occupy 1/3 the total available layers. Therefore the number
of "tours" per phase is
(1/3 2 Rotor Slots) / (Poles) ' 6
Half of these may be wound as in Fig. 104, while the other half are "flipped". The
complete winding of one phase therefore comprises two sections, which may be
connected in series or in parallel. In the example in Fig. 104, each section has
6 TC_R turns in series. The winding factor is calculated from the mean pitch
factor.
Fig. 104 Connections of tapped-winding capacitor motors.
(a) Base case. Different configurations can be set up with CZaux, tMain and tAux.
(b) Grundfos connection (G-tap)
The axis of the aux winding is assumed to be 90E ahead of the axis of the main winding, but
this can be reversed by using CZaux = MainRev or AuxRev.
Fig. 105 T-connection, also known as the Scott connection. (a) The actual
connection. (b) Equivalent single-phase connection with capacitor, which
PC-IMD uses to establish the circuit equations. For parameter setup, see
TapType on p. 63. It is not necessary to specify a capacitor, because PC-IMD
imposes the correct terminal voltage from the 3-phase supply. (See [1]).
Fig. 106 An example of the phasor diagram for the Scott connection
Fig. 107 DegC/W thermal model : TempCalc = DegCW
Fig. 108 HTCoeff thermal model : TempCalc = HTCoeff

Fig. 109 Hot10 thermal model : TempCalc = Hot10
Fig. 110 Hot16 Thermal model : TempCalc = Hot16
Page 176 3.6 Recommended settings PC-IMD 9.04
3.6 Recommended settings
The following settings are recommended for the simplest usage of PCIMD. The list
includes program options and adjustmentfactors. Many adjustment parameters are
experimental or rarely used, and some are obsolete. We have to retain them for
compatibility with very old datafiles. As for the greyedout parameters, it is
recommended to use the indicated settings. It is also strongly recommended to read
the Tutorials and the Reference Manual to make sure you understand the parameters
and havent missed any important ones.
Parameter Value Notes
DeepBar Boldea Calculates deepbar effect (skin effect) in the rotor
slots. This is rarely significant under normal load conditions, but
can be important at lockedrotor, where it increases R2 by the factor
K_r, and decreases X2 by the factor K_x.
For woundrotor motors, PCIMD does not calculate any deepbar effect.
XKr_DB 1 Extensive finiteelement analysis with PCFEA and
FLUX shows that Boldeas deepbar factors are sound.
No need for adjustment.
XKx_DB 1
DiffLeak Alger PCIMD computes differential leakage reactance from the
harmonic winding factors.
Alzz Normal Provides four different options with DiffLeak ' Alger.
Normal is preferred.
DiffSat true The differential leakage reactance shares some of the
magnetic fluxpath of the main flux, particularly in the
stator and rotor toothtip regions. On this basis the
differential leakage reactance Xdiff should experience a
similar saturation factor to that of Xm.
EndLeak SPEED Used for calculating endturn leakage inductance.
This is a bit more critical in 2pole motors. Its not easy to
calculate accurately. All the methods are approximate; so its OK to
choose another one if you think it does a better job.
SPEED tends to give a lower value than the other methods.
EqCCt SPEED The SPEED equivalent circuit is the standard one, and
includes all the basic equivalentcircuit parameters.
Only use Alger if you want to see the effect of winding spaceharmonics
on the torque/speed characteristic. These appear only at high slip
(near zero speed), so they are generally not significant in
inverterfed motors.
XkC 1 Adjusts Carters coefficient. Its hard to justify
any adjustment. Everything weve done shows Carter got
it right (in 1902!)
qC_S,
qC_R
1 Change these to 1 for semiclosed slots or fullyclosed
slots
INLX1 true If false, X1 is excluded from the reactance when
calculating the noload current, so false increases
INL. This helps in cases where the noload current is
underestimated, although a more likely reason for that
problem is poor steel data.
XBst 1
PC-IMD 9.04 3.6 Recommended settings Page 177
XBsy 1
XBrt 1
XBry 1
XLst 1
XLys 1
XLyr 1
XBsh 1
XXm 1
XXL1 1
XXL1s 1
XXL1b 1
XXL2 1
XXL2s 1
XXL2b 1
XErb 1 Has no effect when LkSat ' SPEED. If LkSat ' Norman,
it has an effect only at low current (which is
insignificant anyway).
XErbs 1
XErbb 1
XXskew 1
XR1 1 Use XET and Ext to adjust the stator resistance; dont
use XR1. Reason : we have to get the correct weight as
well as the correct resistance. This means the MLT
must be correct. XR1 adjusts R1 without affecting MLT.
Its only in there for experiments.
XTLR 1 Dont go near them
XTBrk 1
Interbar Off Experimental code. Dont use it!
LkSat Norman Activates Normans method for calculating the effect
of saturation on X1 and X2.
This is important at locked rotor (especially at
fullvoltage locked rotor). It has much less effect at
normal load points.
SatX1X2 Fixed or
Update
Only used with Calc1ph ' XField and IncHx ' 1 and
TapType ' None. "NoSat" recovers old calculations.
NeqnR Fig.51,
p. 100
Selects a variant of Normans method, based on the slot
shapes. Use Fig. 51.
Page 178 3.6 Recommended settings PC-IMD 9.04
NRSO 0 See PCIMD manual.
NLkSat 10 ..if using Normans method and Skew is nonzero;
otherwise use 1
XkX2slot 1
XkX1slot 1
Xkzz 1
MagCalc SPEED This give the most accurate and detailed analysis
resulting in the correct saturated value of the
magnetizing reactance Xm.
Sometimes at high voltages, or with steel BH data that isnt smooth or
doesnt go high enough, the magnetic solver can get stuck, and youll
see a warning message convergence failure. If this happens, reduce
the voltage, or check the steel data.
NonLin true
WFeCalc SPEED This gives the most accurate value for iron loss.
Its worth taking some trouble to ensure accurate loss coefficients for
the steel data. These can be found in the steel database, and details
are in the WinSPEED manual.
XWFeT 1 These can be used in tandem with XFe : they adjust
the teeth and yoke losses independently. XFe
multiplies the whole lot.
XWFeY 1
XFe 1@7 Ageold fudgefactor for iron loss, because Epstein
data always underestimates what happens in the motor
XET Adjust Adjusts the mean length of turn MLT, and hence the stator
resistance.
Note that the copper weight is also affected by XET. If you want to
get the correct value for R1 and WtCu, youll have to make sure you
have exactly the correct wire diameter.
XPCslot
XPRslot
1 The slotleakage reactance is computed assuming that the
slotleakage flux crosses the slot in straight lines, but
in practice the flux lines are not straight, and this
increases the permeance and inductance slightly.
Sometimes we might use 1@1 here.
RcLoc GapFlux ..the conventional position in the T equivalent circuit
(SEM3)
IncShaft AdjRYthk Adjusts the effective thickness of the rotor yoke in
the magnetic equivalent circuit.
XmTol 0@01 or
0@001
Controls the precision of the magnetic circuit solver.
The default value is 1 (to maximize speed), but a small
value should be used to maximize accuracy.
CoilFill 0@7 1 is the default. A smaller value decreases the
endturn leakage reactance because it bunches the
conductors less tightly together
PC-IMD 9.04 3.6 Recommended settings Page 179
kEndCoil 0@7 Average coupling coefficient between coils in
endwinding. See SEM/2 on the subject of endwinding
inductance. Probably 0@7 is a decent value. 1 is
almost certainly too high. A smaller value decreases
the endturn inductance.
XX1end 1
XX2end 1
SLLCalc Detailed
Xwrth 1
Xwsth 1
Xwrtso 1
DistPSLL 0.5 0.5 distributes the strayload loss equally between
"electrical input" and "mechanical output". It makes
very little difference.
"Revert" parameters (TED/3) are provided to reinstate old calculation methods that
have been corrected or revised, in cases where the change in results may be
inconvenient, or where it is considered important to be able to check the effect of
the revision quickly and easily. Generally these are boolean variables and should
be set to FALSE.
For more detail on the theory of the calculations see SPEEDs Electric Machines,
Chapter 3 (SEM3).
Page 180 Errors and Warnings PC-IMD 9.04
3.7 Errors and Warnings
An error generally is a condition recognized by the program, which is associated
with invalid data or a computational error. Errors should not be bypassed; instead,
their cause(s) should be eliminated.
A warning generally is a condition where the data or the computation is likely to
be unsatisfactory. The program will not be halted, but the warning should be
heeded.
In case of difficulty, please send relevant data files (including the appropriate
material databases) to the support office.
DBg[k] < 0
This warning arises in the computation of the noload magnetic flux distribution
(Fig. 29 on page 29). It can arise only when MagCalc ' SPEED. Under heavily
saturated conditions the algorithm that computes this distribution can sometimes end
up with very small negative values especially at the righthand edge, around the
qaxis where the fluxdensity is very low. In earlier versions this was an error
message that had to be cleared by the user, but it has been downgraded to a warning
message. This being so, the noload B
gap
distribution should be checked from time
to time, using Analysis | Noload.
Remedies : Take steps to reduce the saturation in the different parts of the
magnetic circuit. For example, reduce Vs, or reduce XBst, XBsy, XBrt,
and/or XBry. Change MagCalc to Classical. Make sure the BH data in the
steel database is smooth and extends up to a sufficiently high flux-
density (typically 2@5 T is recommended).
3.8 Known issues, corrections and other changes
When MConfig = WR, SFn_R was calculated too low by a factor TC_R. The old
uncorrected value should be multiplied by TC_R to get the correct value.
When MConfig = WR, JRotor was calculated too low by the factor kR_RS. The old
uncorrected value should be multiplied by kR_RS to get the correct value.
Some corrections have been made to the power balance in single-phase motors, but
some discrepancies persist. If IncHx is set higher than a single harmonic, the
problem is not met.
An error in the calculation of mean turn length has been fixed for cases where
CoilForm = Lap or Wave. The previous calculation was making MLT too large by a
factor TC. (Note that CoilForm should not be confused with WdgType).
The stator slot-depth has been corrected for S-slot HW with MConfig ExtRotor.
The correction is approximately twice the airgap length.
The stator tooth-length Lst previously had a negative value when MConfig = ExtRotor,
but this would be used only when XLst 0. (See XLst).
Added the calculation of Lst from the stator tooth geometry for S-slot or HW,
VarDpth, and Flared. This is used only when XLst 0. (See XLst).
Added XLrt to adjust the effective magnetic length of the rotor tooth in the
magnetic equivalent circuit.
ASD (actual stator slot-depth) is now available via the calculator or custom design
sheet.
PC-IMD 9.04 Errors and Warnings Page 181
ATGD (actual stator tooth tang-depth) is now available via the calculator or custom
design sheet.
An error in the calculation of ATStick has been corrected. This is the topstick
area when TopStick true. It will cause a slight change in AslotLL and in the net
slot-fill factor of slots with top-sticks.
TopStick and ATstick have been added in the design sheet, 2.
Added GPAslot, the gross punched area of the stator slot.
WtFeS has been recalculated more accurately, using GPAslot instead of ASlot for the
area removed by punching the stator slots.
TopStick is not permitted with S-slot PllSlot; use SWjType Type1 or Type2.
Top wedge and phase separator are now permitted with S-slot PllSlot.
In the No-load ranging GoFER, Include Shaft is now accessible. Previously it was
greyed out and always checked.
CutoutSpeed is renamed COSpeed. (It had too many characters).
The locked-rotor test frequency can now be specified as fLR_Test. Previously it was
assumed to be equal to Freq.
The no-load test frequency can now be specified as fNL_Test. Previously it was
assumed to be equal to Freq.
Added f_Test (test frequency), to go with the Rated Load Test Data.
S-slot = HW now has SSlotBot = Round or Square, giving the option of a round or
square slot-bottom.
With S-slot = HW and SSlotBot = Square, a fillet radius FilletSB can be obtained at
the bottom corner of the slot.
The Goerges diagram now has an option to be scaled to the arithmetic sum of the
component phasor magnitudes, so that the overall winding factor is immediately
apparent from the size of the diagram.
The thermal editor Data | Thermal editor has been removed. All thermal data is now
entered via Ted.
A new formulation (PCSlot2) has been added to the Slot Permeance GoFER for the slot
permeance coefficient of closed rotor bars as a function of the current-density in
the bar. This effectively replaces the Richter/Trickey/Veinott curve (Fig. 17.11
in Veinott), and is a significant improvement on Erb. It will also help to gauge
the effectiveness of Norman's method.
The parameter ShDens now has no effect. It has been removed from Ted and the design
sheet. (See WtShaft and RotJ).
ROH is now included in the calculation of the shaft weight and inertia.
4. Index
6-Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
A_ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Abar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 157
AC series controller
simulation of . . . . . . . . . . 7
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
at locked-rotor . . . . . . . . 112
see XmTol . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ACond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ACond_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ACondHB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Across-the-line starting . . . . . . . 24
ACu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adiabatic rate of temperature rise . . 135
Adiabatic temperature rise . . . . 23, 47
Ag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
AHT_E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
AHT_E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
AHT_F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
AHT_F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
AHT_R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
AHT_R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Air cooling
forced . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Air exhaust temperature . . . . . . . . 142
Air flow-rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Air inlet temperature . . . . . 90, 91, 142
Air velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
AirFilm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 90
Airgap flux-density . . . . . . . . . . 125
Airgap length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Airgap torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
AirLiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 90
Algebraic node . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
alpha_TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
alphaSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Aluminium conductors . . . . . . . 55, 60
Alzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 80, 140
Ambient heat flows . . . . . . . . . . 144
Ampere-turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Analysis
steady-state . . . . . . . . . . 22
Angularity
in thermal graphs . . . . . . . 35
ANSI C.50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Arbor
see Coil form . . . . . . . . . 64
Area ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ARslot . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 121, 157
ARslotLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
ASlot . . . . . . . . . 115, 162, 163, 167
AslotLL . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 118, 167
ATgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ATR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ATR_bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ATR_ER1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ATR_ER2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ATRatio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ATrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ATry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ATsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ATst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ATsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Automation
of design calculations . . . . . . 2
AuxACHB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
AuxACond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
AuxACu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
AuxCPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AuxExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Auxiliary winding . . . . . . . . . 59, 60
constructing a custom . . . . . 17
turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Auxiliary winding parameters . . . . . 59
AuxPaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AuxSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
AuxSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 59
AuxTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AuxThrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AuxWType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AuxXET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AWG_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
AWG_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
AWG_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Ax1md . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ax2md . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ax3md . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
AxExSh1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
AxExSh2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
AxExSh3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Axial extension . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
of shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Axial lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Axial view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Axis
of phase winding . . . . . . . . 118
AxleCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Backward component of main winding current
. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Backward impedance . . . . . . . . . . 131
Balanced winding . . . . . . . . . 17, 21
BalWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 17
Bar Type G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Bar types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Bar1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 42
Bar2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 42
BarExt . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 69, 157
BarOxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 90
Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Bd_Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Bearing loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Belt leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Bg1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bgm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bgpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
BifAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Bifilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
BifMain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
BlowCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Breakdown
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
in generating region . . . . . . 106
method of calculating . . . . . 106
Breakdown current . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Breakdown torque . . . . . . . . . . . 135
BreakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Brtpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Brushgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Brypk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bshm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 126
accuracy of . . . . . . . . . . 109
Bstpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bsypk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
BWArea_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
BWArea_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
BWDia_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
BWDia_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
C_Brg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 146
C_Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
C_Cu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 146
C_Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
C_RFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
C_SFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C_start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
resistance . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cage 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Calc1ph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 62
CalcFAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CalcFAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CalcFAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CalcMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
sections or rings . . . . . . . 73
Can Loss . . . . . . . . . 6, 22, 73, 133
CanStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Capacitance
run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Capacitor volt-amperes . . . . . . . . 136
Capacitor voltage . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Capacitor-start motor . . . . . . . . . . 3
Capacity node . . . . . . . . . 89, 92, 142
CapThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 159
Carrier frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Carter factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
CFrq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CgDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Chopping frequency . . . . . . . . . . 49
CHT_E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CHT_E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CHT_F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CHT_F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CHT_R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CHT_R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ChX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ChY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Circ. Chf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Circle
Lamshape . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Circuit
used for Drive simulation . . . 26
Circular mils per amp . . . . . . . . . 133
Closed rotor slots . . . . . . . . . . 111
CnsqPole
Consequent-pole windings . . . . 55
Cogging torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
COHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 69
Coil
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Coil list table . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
coil list table . . . . . . . . 14
Coil pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Coil-sides per slot . . . . . . . . . . 166
see Layers . . . . . . . . . . . 118
CoilFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Coilform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CoilPh_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Coils per pole . . . . . . . . . . 54, 169
Collector rings . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Composite conductor . . . . . . . . . . 168
Concentric
coil form . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ConcEqual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ConcSine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ConcUser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
and coil form . . . . . . . . . 64
winding type . . . . . . . . . . 54
Conductivity
of stator conductors . . . . 55, 60
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 170
temperature coefficient . . 55, 60
Conductor
definition . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Conductor temperature . . . . . . . . . 141
Conductors
Aluminium . . . . . . . . . 55, 60
Conductors per phase . . . . . . 118, 169
Conductors per slot . . . . . . . . . . 120
Connection
of external rotor resistance . . 70
Scott T . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
tapped-winding . . . . . . . . . 172
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 54
Consequent-pole windings . . . . . . . 55
Contact area
of slot liner . . . . . . . . . 118
Convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Convergence
see XmTol, ThTol . . . . . . . . 97
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Copper loss in auxiliary winding . . . 136
Copper loss in main winding . . . . . . 136
Core loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 96
resistance . . . . . . . . 127, 130
Core-loss current . . . . . . . . . . . 136
cp_Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
cp_Cu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
cp_Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
cp_RFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
cp_SFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
cp_Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CRatio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Cross-field method . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ct_Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ct_lam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ct_Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ct_Wins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86
Current densities . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Current density . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Custom design sheet . . . . . . . . . . 33
DSS file . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Custom winding . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CutOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CutoutSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 69
CZaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 172
Data
export . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
DBg[k] < 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
DblCage . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66, 68, 129
Deep-bar effect . . . . . . . . . . 6, 170
Deep-bar factors . . . . . . . . . . . 129
DeepBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 104
DegCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
thermal model . . . . . . . . . 174
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dens_WA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Density
in thermal calculation . . . . . 77
of laminations . . . . . . . . . 66
of stator conductors . . . . . . 55
Design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 113
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DFIG
see Doubly-fed machine . . . . . 134
Differential leakage . . . . . . . 97, 127
DiffLeak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 97
DiffSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Direct-on-line starting . . . . . . . . 51
DistPSLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DoPart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Double-cage rotor . . . 7, 42, 66, 68, 170
conductivity . . . . . . . . . . 67
Doubly-fed machine . . . . . . . . . . 134
dqR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
dqS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Drive simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 25
electric circuit . . . . . . . . 26
DSimData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DSimType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
dslip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
dsPF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
dsPhi1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Ducts (cooling) . . . . . . . 44, 124, 160
DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
E1_Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
E1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
E1Rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
E1Rq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
E2_Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
E2m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Eaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Eb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Edit Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Edit View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 42
Ef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Eff_X_PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Effcy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Effective airgap length . . . . . . . . 123
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
EffTotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Eigenvalue analysis . . . . . . . . . 7, 28
Electric circuit
used for Drive simulation . . . 26
Electromagnetic torque . . . . . . . . 133
Emain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
EMTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
End ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
End-cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 159
End-ring parameters . . . . . . . . . . 116
End-rings
conductivity . . . . . . . . . . 67
parameters . . . . . . . . 157, 158
End-turn leakage . . . . . . . . . . . 127
End-winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
End-winding leakage . . . . . . . . . . 103
EndFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
EndLeak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 103
EndWType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Eqcct . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 23, 96, 120
Equivalent circuit . . . . . . . . . . 96
Alger's . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
L-circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 130
parameters . . . . . . . . . 5, 130
Equivalent wye . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
ER2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 132
ERArea1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ERArea2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Erb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Erb2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
ERDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ERID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ERID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ERID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ERIDia1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
ERIDia2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
ERLedge1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
ERLedge2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
EROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 157
EROD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
EROD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ERODia1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
ERODia2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
Errors and Warnings
in outline editor . . . . . . . 10
in winding editor . . . . . . . 17
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ERthk1 . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 157, 158
ERthk2 . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 157, 158
ERType1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
ERType2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
EWDia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
EWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Export data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Ext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 159
Extension
of shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Extension of winding . . . . . . . . . 55
Exterior rotor
see MConfig . . . . . . . . . . 41
f_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
F1_Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
F2_Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
FACCType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
FAWG_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FAWG_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FAWG_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FE Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
FFArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 116
FilletSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
filSB_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
filSWj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Finite-element
link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Finite-element calculations . . . . . . . 7
Finite-element link . . . . . . . . . 9, 38
Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 116, 157
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 166
FinThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 166
Fit algorithm
for sBrk and TBrk . . . . . . . 106
Flared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Flow-rate
of cooling air . . . . . . . . . 91
fLR_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Flux densities . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
fNL_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Forced air cooling . . . . . . . . . . 74
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Forced heat extraction rates . . . . . 84
Form-wound coils
see Coilform . . . . . . . . . . 64
Forward and backward components
in phasor diagram . . . . . . . 34
Forward and backward rotating fields . . 7
Forward component of main winding current
. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Forward impedance . . . . . . . . . . . 131
FracSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Frame
length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
thickness . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Frame parameters . . . . . . . . 116, 159
Frame surface area . . . . . . . . . . 116
Frame temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 140
FrDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . 70
FrLgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 85
FrLgthM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FrThk . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 159, 166
FSArea . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 85, 116
FullSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Function
of PC-IMD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Functions
Custom design sheet . . . . . . 33
G-tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
GDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
GDF Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 38
GoFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 38
No-load . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Grges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Grges diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Gross punched area . . . . . 115, 157, 167
h1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
h2s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
h3s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Hard copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 13
Harmonic loss . . . . . . . . . . 133, 139
Harmonic torque adjustment parameters . 112
Harmonic winding factors . . . . . . . 120
Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
display in winding editor . . . 20
in torque/speed curve . . . . . 96
HBalTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HBWDia_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
HBWDia_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Heat transfer calculation
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Heat transfer coefficient . . . 76, 87, 93
HeatFlux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Heavy build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
HoleDia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Hot10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Hot10 thermal model . . . . . . . . . . 175
Hot10ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 141
Hot16 thermal model . . . . . . . . 74, 175
Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
HTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 91
HTC_E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HTC_E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HTC_F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HTC_F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HTC_R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HTC_R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HTCoeff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
thermal model . . . . . . . . . 174
htFinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
hTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
and thermal graphs . . . . . . 35
HTTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
i_e1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
i_e2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
i_f1F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
i_f2F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
i_r1F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
i_r2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
I_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
I2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
I2m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Ia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Ibm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IBRes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
IBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IBrkpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Ic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136
Ic_aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Ic_main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Icb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Icf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IDCwfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
iEQ_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
iEQ_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Ifm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
iFQ_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
iFQ_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
IL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
IL1rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ILMean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ILPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ILR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ILR_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
ILRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ILRpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Im . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Imag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Imc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
IncHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
IncShaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Induced voltage in main winding . . . . 136
Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 148, 160
densities required . . . . . . . 74
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
accuracy of . . . . . . . . . . 108
INL_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Inlet air temperature . . . . . . . . . 91
INLpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
INLX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
InsThk_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
InsThk_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
InsThk_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Insulation
in slot . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Insulation thickness . . . . . . . . . 119
Integration step-length . . . . . . . . 51
Interbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 104
Interbar currents . . . . . . . . . 7, 104
Interbar resistance . . . . . . . . . . 104
Interior rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Inverter
electric circuit . . . . . . . . 26
simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 25
simulation of . . . . . . . . . . 7
Iph1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Irated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Iron loss
method of calculation . . . . . 72
iRQ_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
iRQ_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ISLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Iw1rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWMean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
J_ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Jaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Jbar1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
JcmA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
JFan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
JL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Jmain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Joule loss (copper loss) . . . . . . . 143
Jrms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
JRotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
k_gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
K_r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
K_r2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
K_x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
K_x2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
kBg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
kC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 124
kC_r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
kC_rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
kC_s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
kC_sd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
kEndCoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
kfE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Kinematic viscosity . . . . . . . . . . 147
kr_RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Kring1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Kring2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ks1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
kw1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
kw1_aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
kw1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
kX1slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 128
kX2slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 128
kXL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
kXL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
kXm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 125
kXm.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
kzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 128
L-Equivalent circuit . . . . . . . . . 130
L_RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Lamination
shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
LamShape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 161
Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Lap winding
coil form . . . . . . . . . . . 64
LaxPack . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 118, 159
LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
LB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
LCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Leakage reactance . . . . . . . . . 6, 127
saturation . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Length
of turns . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
LFeR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
LFeS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
LFin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 166
LFrame . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148, 159
Lge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Lgth_CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Line start calculation . . . . . . . . 24
Line starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 86, 166
Liner_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
LkSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Locked-rotor current . . . . . . . . . 135
Locked-rotor test . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Locked-rotor torque . . . . . . . . . . 135
Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
friction and windage . . . . . . 71
harmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
stray load . . . . . . . . . . . 71
LR+Brk+NL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Lst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lstk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 66
MagCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 97
Magnetic circuit
method of analysis . . . . . . . 97
Magnetic wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Magnetizing reactance . . . . . . . 6, 127
adjustment factor . . . . . . . 111
Main winding
constructing a custom . . . . . 17
MainACu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
MatchFE
No-load . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Matrix analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Maximum temperature
location of . . . . . . . . . . 142
Maximum winding temperature . . . . . . 142
MaxSFg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
MaxSFn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
MConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mean length of turn . . . . . . . . . . 118
and coil form . . . . . . . . . 64
mIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Minimum winding temperature . . . . . . 142
MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
accuracy of . . . . . . . . . . 64
and coil form . . . . . . . . . 64
MLT_Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
MLT_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
MMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MMF harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
MMFrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MMFry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MMFsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MMFst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MMFsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ModStrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Modulation
PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Moment of inertia . . . . . . . . . . . 148
muPlug . . . . . . . . . . 6, 66, 111, 157
muWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MWG_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
MWG_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
MWG_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
N_CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
N_Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Negative sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NeqnR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NeqnS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Nested coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NHDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NLkSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
No-load : MatchFE . . . . . . . . . . . 30
No-load calculation . . . . . . . . 29, 126
No-load current . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
No-load ranging . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
No-load saturation curve . . . . . . . 30
No-load test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
No-load torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Norman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NRDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
NRFins1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 157
NRFins2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 157
NRSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NSDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
NSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 166
NSH_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 168
NSH_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 168
NSH_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
NSH_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
nu_gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
NumHoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
NWFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 54
oInsThk1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
oInsThk2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
oInsThkA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Open-circuit time-constant . . . . . . 128
OpMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Outline editor . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 10
Output
see Design sheet . . . . . . . . 32
Output parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Outside rotor
see MConfig . . . . . . . . . . 41
OverCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Oxide layer
around rotor bars . . . . . . . 90
P.F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
P/Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
P_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Parallel paths . . . . . . . 55, 168, 169
Partial load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Partial load calculations . . . . . . . 46
Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
see PPaths . . . . . . . . . . . 55
PBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
PC-FEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
PC-IMD
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
intended use . . . . . . . . . . . 1
motor types . . . . . . . . . . . 3
scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PC_WA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
PC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69, 170
PC1_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
PC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
PC2_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
PCC
point of common coupling . . . . 134
PCDia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
PCEndR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PCEndR_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
PCN_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
PCplug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
PCSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
PElec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Percentage conductivity
of rotor bar . . . . . . . . . . 67
of stator conductors . . . . 55, 60
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Performance
at partial load . . . . . . . . 149
performance calculation . . . . . . . . . 1
Permeance coefficient . . . . . . . . . 118
of rotor slot . . . . . . . . . 120
PET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
PFBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PFLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PFNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Pgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Phase separator . . . . . . . 58, 166, 167
Phase sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Phasebelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Phasebelt harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Phi1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
PhsLeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166
PhsThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166
PhsWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166
phVaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
phVZc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
PllRound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
PllSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
PllSquare . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 180
PllTooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
PLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PLR_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
PNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PNL_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Point of common coupling . . . . . . . 134
Point-on-wave switching . . . . . 7, 24, 50
Pole area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pole pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Positive sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Postnikov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Power balance
with IncHx > 1 . . . . . . . . . 96
Power factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PowrSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PPaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 168
PPaths_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PPitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Precision
see XmTol . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Primitive impedance matrix . . . . . . 27
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 13
cross-section . . . . . . . 10, 13
PRslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PshaftHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
pTBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
pTWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Pulsating torque . . . . . . . . . . . 133
puPole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
PWM
simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 25
simulation of . . . . . . . . . . 7
PWM losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PXR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
q_Absorb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
q_Disspn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
q_Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Qair_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Qair_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
qC_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
qC_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
QStatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
QXR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
R_Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
R_Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
R_Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
r_CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
R_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
R_dr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
R_fa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
R_rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
R_run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
R_RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
R_start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
R_ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
R_ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
R_yf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
R_yfa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
R1_Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
R1_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
R1_test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
R1Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
R1g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
R2_Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
R2_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
R2_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
R25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R2m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R2n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rabinovici triangles . . . . . . . . . 148
Rad0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rad1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rad3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
RadSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 160
RadSh2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
RadSh3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 31
RBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 96, 127
Rc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Rc_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rc_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
RCable20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
RCanOH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RCanOH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RCanSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RCanTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RCanThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RcLoc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
RCoil20R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RConnex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Rdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Reactances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
of cooling air . . . . . . . . . 91
Rect.
Lamshape . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Rect. Rnd.
Lamshape . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
REndRing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Resistance
adjustment factor . . . . . . . 111
external . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
of cable . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
of rotor bar . . . . . . . . . . 67
Resistances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Resistivity
see Conductivity . . . . . . . . 170
Retaining can . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Retrogressive wave winding . . . . . . 171
RFinL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 157
RFinL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 157
RFinThk1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 157
RFinThk2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 157
RhoBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
RhoEndR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rim1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
Rim2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 158
RLL_Amb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
RLL20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
RLL20_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ROH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 66, 160
RoShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 42
RotJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
Rotor bar
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
conductivity . . . . . . . . . . 67
Rotor bar types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rotor cage parameters . . . . . . . . . 120
Rotor copper loss . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Rotor reference coil . . . . . . . . . 12
Rotor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rotor time-constant . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rotor winding . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 171
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 69
retrogressive . . . . . . . . . 171
RotorOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 157
RotState . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Rpc_Can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rph_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RphR_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RphRXeqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
RPM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
rpmBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
rpmNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
rpmS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
rSLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
RSteel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
RTC_OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
RTC_SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Runge-Kutta method . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rvt_GB15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
RvtTap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
RvtWSCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
RWdgType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
RX_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
rx_yf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
RXConnex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
S-slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 165
s_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
of leakage reactance . . 6, 99, 101
of magnetizing reactance . . . . . 6
Split-phase motors . . . . . . . 101
SatX1X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
SAWG_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SAWG_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SBFull . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 115, 157
sBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
sBrkType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
SBWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
SCanOH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCanOH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCanSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCanTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCanThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Scott T-connection . . . . . . . . . . 172
Scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SD_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-164
SDS_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SDS_B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SDS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SDS_D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SetBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SFg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SFg_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SFg_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SFg_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SFg_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
SFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
SFillHBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
SFn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SFn_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SFn_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SFn_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SFn_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Shaft
in magnetic circuit . . . . . . 97
radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
weight . . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
Shaft extension . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Shaft flux
accuracy of . . . . . . . . . . 109
Shaft torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Short-circuit time-constant . . . . . 128
Shrink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 157
Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
of cage bars . . . . . . . . . . 67
of rotor bar . . . . . . . . . . 67
ShSteel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sign convention
motoring and generating . . . . 134
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Single-phase motor . . . . . . . . . 3, 7
Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 115, 120
units of . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Skew leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
when DiffLeak = Alger . . . . . 127
when DiffLeak = CGV . . . . . . 128
SkewUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Skin effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
in rotor bars . . . . . . . . . 104
SL User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SL%PSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Slip-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
SLLCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 71
Slot area . . . . . . . . . . 115, 162, 163
of rotor slot . . . . . . . . . 157
Slot depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Slot designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Slot fill factor
input value of . . . . . . . . . 57
Slot leakage reactance . . . . . . . . 127
saturation factor . . . . . . . 128
Slot liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
contact area and length . . . . 118
Slot mmf harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Slot permeance harmonics . . . . . 5, 130
Slot shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Slot wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Slot-fill factor . . . . . . . . . . . 117
SlotOrd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 165
Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 86
see Bar types . . . . . . . . . . 4
sLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
sLR_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
sNL_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
SO_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-165
SO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
SOang . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 162-165
Soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 24
simulation of . . . . . . . . . . 7
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 54, 168
Spc_Can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Specific core loss . . . . . . . . . . 138
Specific heats . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Specific iron loss . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
synchronous . . . . . . . . . . 47
Speed of calculation
see XmTol . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Split-phase motor . . . . . . . . . . 3, 7
Split-phase motors
performance parameters . . . . . 136
unbalanced winding . . . . . . . 17
SplitPh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
spWFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Square lamination . . . . . . . . . 41, 161
SSteel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
SSWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
St. Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 24, 50
St.Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Stacking factor . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Star/delta starting
see WyeDelta . . . . . . . . . . 51
Start winding
see auxiliary winding . . . . . 59
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Starting transient . . . . . . . . . . 24
StartRun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Stator copper loss . . . . . . . . . . 133
Stator leakage reactance . . . . . . . 127
Stator slot-opening
dip in flux-density . . . . . . 139
Stator steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Stator tooth overhang . . . . . . . . . 115
StatorOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Steady state analysis . . . . . . . . . 22
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Steinmetz equation . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Stf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 66
STOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Strand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Strands-in-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
see NSH . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Stray load loss . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
components of . . . . . . . . . 139
Stray-load loss . . . . . . . . 6, 71, 133
ANSIC.50 method . . . . . . . . 29
distribution of . . . . . . . . 71
Supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
SWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SWG_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
SwjType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Symmetrical components
in winding editor . . . . . . . 21
Symmetrical-component method . . . . . . 7
Synchronous watts . . . . . . . . . . . 133
SYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 161
T.Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
T-connection . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 172
T/Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
T_aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 106
T_c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 141
T_CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
T_e1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T_e2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T_f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 141
T_f1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T_f2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T_max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
T_r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 141
T_r1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T_r2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T_ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
T_rtr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
T_rtr_B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
T_rtr_NL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
T_rtr_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
T_wdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
T_wdg_B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
T_wdg_NL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
T_wdg_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
T_y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
T1_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
T1LRTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
T1NLTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
T2_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
T2LRTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
T2NLTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Tapped winding . . . . . . . . . . 63, 172
Tapped-winding motor . . . . . . . . . . 3
TapType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
tAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 172
Taylor number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
TBrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TBrkpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TBrkTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 166, 169
TC_FACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
TC_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TC01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 168
TC02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 168
TC03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 168
TC04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TC05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TC06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
TCC_WA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
TCC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69, 170
TCC1_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
TCC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
TCC2_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
TCCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
TCCN_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 170
Ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TEF_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
TEF_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Temperature
Hotspot location . . . . . . . . 142
of auxiliary winding . . . . . . 75
of exhaust air . . . . . . . . . 142
of inlet air . . . . . . . . 91, 142
of main winding . . . . . . . . 75
of rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Temperature coefficient
of conductivity . . . . . . 55, 60
Temperature node type . . . . . . . . . 80
Temperature rise . . . . . . . 35, 74, 140
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
of rotor during starting . . . . 23
Template editor . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 13
TempRise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
TestPts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
TGang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 163
TGANG_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-165
see TGorSO, TGang . . . . . . . 41
TGD_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-165
TGorSO . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 162, 163
th1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
th2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Thermal analysis . . . . . . . . 8, 35, 74
thermal model . . . . . . 174, 175
Thermal calculations . . . . . . . . . . 7
Thermal capacitance . . . . . 77, 141, 146
additional . . . . . . . . . . . 78
of rotor cage . . . . . . . . . 135
of stator copper . . . . . . . . 135
Thermal conductivity . . . . . . . 85, 147
Thermal graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Thermal node types . . . . . . . . . . 80
Thermal resistance . . . . . . . . 76, 140
disconnection of . . . . . . . . 80
Thermal resistances . . . . . . . . . . 82
Thermal time-constant . . . . . . . 77, 141
ThermTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
thm_dt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
and thermal graphs . . . . . . 35
thR_CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_CY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
thR_FAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 88
ThR_FAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 88
ThR_FAU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ThR_FAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 87
ThR_fs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 174
thR_RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_SG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
thR_TY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ThR_ws . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 76, 174
thR_YF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 168
Throw_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ThRslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 174
ThTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
THx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Ti_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ti_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Time-constant
Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
thermal . . . . . . . . . . 77, 141
TL0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
TL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
TLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TLRpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
tMain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 172
TmaxWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tmid_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tmid_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tmid_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
TminWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
TNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TNLpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
To_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
To_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tolerance
in Breakdown calculation . . . . 107
in magnetic circuit calculation 97
Tooth overhang . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tooth tang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Top wedge . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166, 167
TopStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 167
TorqCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 135
TorqSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 132
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
cogging . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
required . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Torque/speed characteristic . . . . . . 23
and wye/delta starting . . . . . 51
harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Total losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Tour
of retrogressive wave winding . 171
Tph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tph_Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tph1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tph1Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tpls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Transistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TRE_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
TRE_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
TRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
TS_max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
TS_min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
TSmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
TSmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
mean length . . . . . . . . . . 118
per coil . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Turns in series per phase . . . . . . . 118
Turns ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 119
rotor/stator . . . . . . . . . . 120
TW_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 164
Twfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
TwjLeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166
TwjThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166
TwjWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 166
Type G rotor bar . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Types of motor
motor types . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Uair_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Uair_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
UMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Unbalanced magnetic pull . . . . . . . 66
Unbalanced winding . . . . . . . . . . 17
Unexpected termination . . . . . . . . 180
Unsymmetric windings . . . . . . . . . 15
User-defined title . . . . . . . . . . 113
uTmax_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
uTmax_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
uX1oX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 96, 130
V_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
V_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
VA_Zc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
VarDpth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Vaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Vdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
VdcMean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Ventilation ducts . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ventilation holes . . . . . . . . . . . 41
VLL1rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
VLR_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
VNL_Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
VolSpHt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Voltage
range of . . . . . . . . . 8, 9, 30
supply . . . . . . . . . . 5, 22, 46
Voltage across auxiliary winding . . . 136
VR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 132
VR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 132
Vrd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Vrq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
VX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 132
VX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 132
Vz1m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
VZc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
W_brg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 143
W_Zc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
w1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
w2s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
w3s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
wa_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
wa_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
wa_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
wa_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Watts/lb
see Specific iron loss . . . . . 138
Wave winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
coil form . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Waveforms
in Drive simulation . . . . . . 26
wb_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
wb_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
wb_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
wb_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
WB11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WB13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WB5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
WCu_end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
WCu_slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
WCuAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
WCuMain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
WCuR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 143
WCuRbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
WCuRends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
WCuS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 143
WdgType . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 54, 168
ConcUser . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
WDia_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
WDia_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
WDia_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
WDia_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
in slots . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
rotor slot . . . . . . . . . . . 66
stator slot . . . . . . . . . . 58
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
densities required . . . . . . . 74
of shaft . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Wf0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 71
WFe0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFe0R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFe0S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFe0Sh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFeAxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
WFeBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 72
WFeR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 143
WFeRe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFeRh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFeS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 143
WFeSe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WFeSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Windage and friction . . . . . . . . . 133
Winding
custom . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
definitions . . . . . . . . . . 169
rotor . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 171
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
type . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 54
Winding editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
hard copy . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Winding factors . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Winding temperature . . . . . . . . 75, 140
WinSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wire
strand . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Wire_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
Wire_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
Wire_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 60
Wire_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
WireCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
WireDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
WIron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Wound rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
brushgear . . . . . . . . . . . 160
coil form . . . . . . . . . . . 64
collector rings . . . . . . . . 160
configuration . . . . . . . . . 70
rotor winding . . . . . . . . . 171
WPm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Wrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
WRCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
WRDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 160
WriteMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Wrotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Wrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wrt_so . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Wrte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wrth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
WrtWkg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wrye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wryh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WryWkg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WSCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
WSDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 160
WSLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 143
Wst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 143
Wste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wsth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
WstWkg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WSWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Wsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 143
Wsye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wsyh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
WsyWkg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wt_Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wt_Cu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wt_Fe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wt_Tot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtAl_ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtAl_RB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtCap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtCuAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtCuMain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtFeR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtFeS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtFest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtFesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WtFrame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
WTotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 143
WtShaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
WtTri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wwf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 143
WX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
WY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Wye/delta starting . . . . . . . . 23, 51
simulation of . . . . . . . . . . 7
WyeDelta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
WZm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
WZn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
X_Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
x_CBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
X_rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
X1_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
X1aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
X1belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
X1diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
X1end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
X1end.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
X1oX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 130
X1skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X1slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
X1unsat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
X1zz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
X211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
X213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
X22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
X27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
X2Aug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2end.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
X2m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
X2n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
X2skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2unsat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
X2zz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
XBrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
XBry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
XBsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XBst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
XBsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
XErb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XErbb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XErbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 159
XET_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
XFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
XFSArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
XkC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 124
XKr_DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
XKx_DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
XkX1Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
XkX2slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Xkzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
XL_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XLrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XLst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XLyr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XLys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Xm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 29, 127
Xm.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Xm_eqY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Xm_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xm0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Xm11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xm13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xm5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xm7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XmHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xmm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xmn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XmTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
XPCslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Xpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Xpn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XPRslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
XR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XR1Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
XStf_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
XTbrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XTh11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XTh13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XTh5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XTh7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XThLoss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
XThmm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XThnn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XThpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XThpn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XTLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XWFe_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
XWFe_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
XWFe_T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
XWFe_Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
XWFeT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
XWFeY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
XWrth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
XWrtso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
XWsth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
XX1aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
XX1end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
XX2end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
XXL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXL1b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXL1s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXL2b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXL2s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XXskew . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 127
Yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Z0_Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Z0_Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ZbR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ZbX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ZcR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ZcX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Zero sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ZfR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ZfX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Zig-zag leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
zslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ZXR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ZXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Imdmanual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Imdmanual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

868 195/195 1536

PC-IMD User's Manual

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen